From 6e1cb38a2aef7680975e71f23de187859ee8b158 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Suresh Siddha Date: Thu, 10 Jul 2008 11:16:58 -0700 Subject: x64, x2apic/intr-remap: add x2apic support, including enabling interrupt-remapping x2apic support. Interrupt-remapping must be enabled before enabling x2apic, this is needed to ensure that IO interrupts continue to work properly after the cpu mode is changed to x2apic(which uses 32bit extended physical/cluster apic id). On systems where apicid's are > 255, BIOS can handover the control to OS in x2apic mode. Or if the OS handover was in legacy xapic mode, check if it is capable of x2apic mode. And if we succeed in enabling Interrupt-remapping, then we can enable x2apic mode in the CPU. Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Cc: akpm@linux-foundation.org Cc: arjan@linux.intel.com Cc: andi@firstfloor.org Cc: ebiederm@xmission.com Cc: jbarnes@virtuousgeek.org Cc: steiner@sgi.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 795c487af8e4..56689ef1a159 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1377,6 +1377,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. + nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode. + noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel lowmem mapping on PPC40x. -- cgit v1.2.2 From af9d13887f9e3699bbc852c39b076d30bb9dff2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Suresh Siddha Date: Fri, 11 Jul 2008 13:11:57 -0700 Subject: x2apic: kernel-parameter documentation for "x2apic_phys" Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Cc: akpm@linux-foundation.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 56689ef1a159..88b08acf2ff2 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1379,6 +1379,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode. + x2apic_phys [X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of + default x2apic cluster mode on platforms + supporting x2apic. + noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel lowmem mapping on PPC40x. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5616c23ad9cd3c50af674d408fef7b90abeee81c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "H. Peter Anvin" Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 15:32:38 -0400 Subject: x86: doc: move x86-generic documentation from Doc/x86/i386 The boot protocol, USB legacy support, and zero-page documentation is common to the x86 platform, not i386-specific. Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 900 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt | 900 -------------------------- Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt | 44 -- Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt | 31 - Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt | 44 ++ Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt | 31 + 6 files changed, 975 insertions(+), 975 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/boot.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..147bfe511cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -0,0 +1,900 @@ + THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL + --------------------------- + +On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot +convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as +well as the desire in the early days to have the kernel itself be a +bootable image, the complicated PC memory model and due to changed +expectations in the PC industry caused by the effective demise of +real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system. + +Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist. + +Old kernels: zImage/Image support only. Some very early kernels + may not even support a command line. + +Protocol 2.00: (Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as + well as a formalized way to communicate between the + boot loader and the kernel. setup.S made relocatable, + although the traditional setup area still assumed + writable. + +Protocol 2.01: (Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning. + +Protocol 2.02: (Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol. + Lower the conventional memory ceiling. No overwrite + of the traditional setup area, thus making booting + safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit + BIOS entry points. zImage deprecated but still + supported. + +Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible + initrd address available to the bootloader. + +Protocol 2.04: (Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes. + +Protocol 2.05: (Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable. + Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields. + +Protocol 2.06: (Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of + the boot command line. + +Protocol 2.07: (Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol. + Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data + and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags. + +Protocol 2.08: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format + payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length + fields to aid in locating the payload. + +Protocol 2.09: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical + pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data. + +**** MEMORY LAYOUT + +The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or +zImage kernels, typically looks like: + + | | +0A0000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA. +09A000 +------------------------+ + | Command line | + | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. +098000 +------------------------+ + | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. +090200 +------------------------+ + | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. +090000 +------------------------+ + | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image. +010000 +------------------------+ + | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 +001000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | +000800 +------------------------+ + | Typically used by MBR | +000600 +------------------------+ + | BIOS use only | +000000 +------------------------+ + + +When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to +0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector, +setup, and stack/heap) was made relocatable to any address between +0x10000 and end of low memory. Unfortunately, in protocols 2.00 and +2.01 the 0x90000+ memory range is still used internally by the kernel; +the 2.02 protocol resolves that problem. + +It is desirable to keep the "memory ceiling" -- the highest point in +low memory touched by the boot loader -- as low as possible, since +some newer BIOSes have begun to allocate some rather large amounts of +memory, called the Extended BIOS Data Area, near the top of low +memory. The boot loader should use the "INT 12h" BIOS call to verify +how much low memory is available. + +Unfortunately, if INT 12h reports that the amount of memory is too +low, there is usually nothing the boot loader can do but to report an +error to the user. The boot loader should therefore be designed to +take up as little space in low memory as it reasonably can. For +zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the +0x90000 segment, the boot loader should make sure not to use memory +above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point. + +For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a +memory layout like the following is suggested: + + ~ ~ + | Protected-mode kernel | +100000 +------------------------+ + | I/O memory hole | +0A0000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused + ~ ~ + | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark) +X+10000 +------------------------+ + | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. +X+08000 +------------------------+ + | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. + | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. +X +------------------------+ + | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 +001000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | +000800 +------------------------+ + | Typically used by MBR | +000600 +------------------------+ + | BIOS use only | +000000 +------------------------+ + +... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader +permits. + + +**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER + +In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a +sector" refers to 512 bytes. It is independent of the actual sector +size of the underlying medium. + +The first step in loading a Linux kernel should be to load the +real-mode code (boot sector and setup code) and then examine the +following header at offset 0x01f1. The real-mode code can total up to +32K, although the boot loader may choose to load only the first two +sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size. + +The header looks like: + +Offset Proto Name Meaning +/Size + +01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors +01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly +01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras +01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only +01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control +01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number +01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number +0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction +0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS" +0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported +0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below) +020C/2 2.00+ start_sys The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete) +020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string +0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier +0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags +0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size (used with hooks) +0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below) +0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader) +021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader) +0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only +0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end +0226/2 N/A pad1 Unused +0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line +022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address +0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel +0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not +0235/3 N/A pad2 Unused +0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line +023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture +0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data +0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload +024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload +0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list + of struct setup_data + +(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the + real value is 4. + +(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize + field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel + cannot be determined. + +If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, +the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the +following parameters should be assumed: + + Image type = zImage + initrd not supported + Real-mode kernel must be located at 0x90000. + +Otherwise, the "version" field contains the protocol version, +e.g. protocol version 2.01 will contain 0x0201 in this field. When +setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields +supported by the protocol version in use. + + +**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS + +For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader +("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader +("write"), and some are expected to be read and modified by the +bootloader ("modify"). + +All general purpose boot loaders should write the fields marked +(obligatory). Boot loaders who want to load the kernel at a +nonstandard address should fill in the fields marked (reloc); other +boot loaders can ignore those fields. + +The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.) + +Field name: setup_sects +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1f1/1 +Protocol: ALL + + The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors. If this field is + 0, the real value is 4. The real-mode code consists of the boot + sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code. + +Field name: root_flags +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x1f2/2 +Protocol: ALL + + If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly. The use of + this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the + command line instead. + +Field name: syssize +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL) +Protocol: 2.04+ + + The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs. + For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes + wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if + the LOAD_HIGH flag is set. + +Field name: ram_size +Type: kernel internal +Offset/size: 0x1f8/2 +Protocol: ALL + + This field is obsolete. + +Field name: vid_mode +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x1fa/2 + + Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS. + +Field name: root_dev +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x1fc/2 +Protocol: ALL + + The default root device device number. The use of this field is + deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead. + +Field name: boot_flag +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1fe/2 +Protocol: ALL + + Contains 0xAA55. This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have + to a magic number. + +Field name: jump +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x200/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset + relative to byte 0x202. This can be used to determine the size of + the header. + +Field name: header +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x202/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448). + +Field name: version +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x206/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format, + e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version + 10.17. + +Field name: readmode_swtch +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x208/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) + +Field name: start_sys +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x20c/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. + +Field name: kernel_version +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x20e/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated + human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200. This can + be used to display the kernel version to the user. This value + should be less than (0x200*setup_sects). + + For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version + number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file. + This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field + contains the value 15 or higher, as: + + 0x1c00 < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but + 0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00) + + 0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15. + +Field name: type_of_loader +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x210/1 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter + 0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is + a version number. Otherwise, enter 0xFF here. + + Assigned boot loader ids: + 0 LILO (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader) + 1 Loadlin + 2 bootsect-loader (0x20, all other values reserved) + 3 SYSLINUX + 4 EtherBoot + 5 ELILO + 7 GRuB + 8 U-BOOT + 9 Xen + A Gujin + B Qemu + + Please contact if you need a bootloader ID + value assigned. + +Field name: loadflags +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x211/1 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + This field is a bitmask. + + Bit 0 (read): LOADED_HIGH + - If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000. + - If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000. + + Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG + - If 0, print early messages. + - If 1, suppress early messages. + This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early + kernel) to not write early messages that require + accessing the display hardware directly. + + Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS + Protocol: 2.07+ + - If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. + - If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. + Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with + a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment). + + Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP + Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the + heap_end_ptr is valid. If this field is clear, some setup code + functionality will be disabled. + +Field name: setup_move_size +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x212/2 +Protocol: 2.00-2.01 + + When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not + loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading + sequence. Fill in this field if you want additional data (such as + the kernel command line) moved in addition to the real-mode kernel + itself. + + The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector. + + This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or + if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000. + +Field name: code32_start +Type: modify (optional, reloc) +Offset/size: 0x214/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The address to jump to in protected mode. This defaults to the load + address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to + determine the proper load address. + + This field can be modified for two purposes: + + 1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) + + 2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a + relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify + this field to point to the load address. + +Field name: ramdisk_image +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x218/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at + zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs. + +Field name: ramdisk_size +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x21c/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at zero if there is no + initial ramdisk/ramfs. + +Field name: bootsect_kludge +Type: kernel internal +Offset/size: 0x220/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + This field is obsolete. + +Field name: heap_end_ptr +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x224/2 +Protocol: 2.01+ + + Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode + code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200. + +Field name: cmd_line_ptr +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x228/4 +Protocol: 2.02+ + + Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line. + The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of + the setup heap and 0xA0000; it does not have to be located in the + same 64K segment as the real-mode code itself. + + Fill in this field even if your boot loader does not support a + command line, in which case you can point this to an empty string + (or better yet, to the string "auto".) If this field is left at + zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support + the 2.02+ protocol. + +Field name: initrd_addr_max +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x22c/4 +Protocol: 2.03+ + + The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial + ramdisk/ramfs contents. For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this + field is not present, and the maximum address is 0x37FFFFFF. (This + address is defined as the address of the highest safe byte, so if + your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is + 0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.) + +Field name: kernel_alignment +Type: read (reloc) +Offset/size: 0x230/4 +Protocol: 2.05+ + + Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is true.) + +Field name: relocatable_kernel +Type: read (reloc) +Offset/size: 0x234/1 +Protocol: 2.05+ + + If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can + be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field. + After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to + point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook. + +Field name: cmdline_size +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x238/4 +Protocol: 2.06+ + + The maximum size of the command line without the terminating + zero. This means that the command line can contain at most + cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the + maximum size was 255. + +Field name: hardware_subarch +Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC) +Offset/size: 0x23c/4 +Protocol: 2.07+ + + In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural + pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and + accessing process control registers needs to be done differently. + + This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one + one of those environments. + + 0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment + 0x00000001 lguest + 0x00000002 Xen + +Field name: hardware_subarch_data +Type: write (subarch-dependent) +Offset/size: 0x240/8 +Protocol: 2.07+ + + A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch + This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment, + do not modify. + +Field name: payload_offset +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x248/4 +Protocol: 2.08+ + + If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the + real-mode code to the payload. + + The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and + uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic + numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used. + +Field name: payload_length +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x24c/4 +Protocol: 2.08+ + + The length of the payload. + +Field name: setup_data +Type: write (special) +Offset/size: 0x250/8 +Protocol: 2.09+ + + The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of + struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot + parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is + as follow: + + struct setup_data { + u64 next; + u32 type; + u32 len; + u8 data[0]; + }; + + Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of + linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used + to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data + field; the data holds the real payload. + + This list may be modified at a number of points during the bootup + process. Therefore, when modifying this list one should always make + sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains + entries. + + +**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM + +From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over +the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an +initial remainder of 0xffffffff. The checksum is appended to the +file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the +syssize field of the header is always 0. + + +**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE + +The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot +loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also +relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" +below. + +The kernel command line is a null-terminated string. The maximum +length can be retrieved from the field cmdline_size. Before protocol +version 2.06, the maximum was 255 characters. A string that is too +long will be automatically truncated by the kernel. + +If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the +kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see +above.) This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup +heap and 0xA0000. + +If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel +command line is entered using the following protocol: + + At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic + number 0xA33F. + + At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset + of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the + real-mode kernel). + + The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region + covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this + field. + + +**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE + +The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as +memory allocated for the kernel command line. This needs to be done +in the real-mode accessible memory in bottom megabyte. + +It should be noted that modern machines often have a sizable Extended +BIOS Data Area (EBDA). As a result, it is advisable to use as little +of the low megabyte as possible. + +Unfortunately, under the following circumstances the 0x90000 memory +segment has to be used: + + - When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0). + - When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel. + + -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code + can be loaded at another address, but it is internally + relocated to 0x90000. For the "old" protocol, the + real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000. + +When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000. + +For boot protocol 2.02 or higher, the command line does not have to be +located in the same 64K segment as the real-mode setup code; it is +thus permitted to give the stack/heap the full 64K segment and locate +the command line above it. + +The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode +code, nor should it be located in high memory. + + +**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION + +As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real +mode segment: + + When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment: + + 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel + 0x8000-0xdfff Stack and heap + 0xe000-0xffff Kernel command line + + When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier: + + 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel + 0x8000-0x97ff Stack and heap + 0x9800-0x9fff Kernel command line + +Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header: + + unsigned long base_ptr; /* base address for real-mode segment */ + + if ( setup_sects == 0 ) { + setup_sects = 4; + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0200 ) { + type_of_loader = ; + if ( loading_initrd ) { + ramdisk_image = ; + ramdisk_size = ; + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0202 && loadflags & 0x01 ) + heap_end = 0xe000; + else + heap_end = 0x9800; + + if ( protocol >= 0x0201 ) { + heap_end_ptr = heap_end - 0x200; + loadflags |= 0x80; /* CAN_USE_HEAP */ + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0202 ) { + cmd_line_ptr = base_ptr + heap_end; + strcpy(cmd_line_ptr, cmdline); + } else { + cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; + cmd_line_offset = heap_end; + setup_move_size = heap_end + strlen(cmdline)+1; + strcpy(base_ptr+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); + } + } else { + /* Very old kernel */ + + heap_end = 0x9800; + + cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; + cmd_line_offset = heap_end; + + /* A very old kernel MUST have its real-mode code + loaded at 0x90000 */ + + if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) { + /* Copy the real-mode kernel */ + memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512); + base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */ + } + + strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); + + /* It is recommended to clear memory up to the 32K mark */ + memset(0x90000 + (setup_sects+1)*512, 0, + (64-(setup_sects+1))*512); + } + + +**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL + +The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 +in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) +It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and +0x100000 for bzImage kernels. + +The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 +bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set: + + is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01); + load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000; + +Note that Image/zImage kernels can be up to 512K in size, and thus use +the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory. This means it is pretty +much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at +0x90000. bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility. + + +**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS + +If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the +user, the user may expect the following command line options to work. +They should normally not be deleted from the kernel command line even +though not all of them are actually meaningful to the kernel. Boot +loader authors who need additional command line options for the boot +loader itself should get them registered in +Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt to make sure they will not +conflict with actual kernel options now or in the future. + + vga= + here is either an integer (in C notation, either + decimal, octal, or hexadecimal) or one of the strings + "normal" (meaning 0xFFFF), "ext" (meaning 0xFFFE) or "ask" + (meaning 0xFFFD). This value should be entered into the + vid_mode field, as it is used by the kernel before the command + line is parsed. + + mem= + is an integer in C notation optionally followed by + (case insensitive) K, M, G, T, P or E (meaning << 10, << 20, + << 30, << 40, << 50 or << 60). This specifies the end of + memory to the kernel. This affects the possible placement of + an initrd, since an initrd should be placed near end of + memory. Note that this is an option to *both* the kernel and + the bootloader! + + initrd= + An initrd should be loaded. The meaning of is + obviously bootloader-dependent, and some boot loaders + (e.g. LILO) do not have such a command. + +In addition, some boot loaders add the following options to the +user-specified command line: + + BOOT_IMAGE= + The boot image which was loaded. Again, the meaning of + is obviously bootloader-dependent. + + auto + The kernel was booted without explicit user intervention. + +If these options are added by the boot loader, it is highly +recommended that they are located *first*, before the user-specified +or configuration-specified command line. Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh" +gets confused by the "auto" option. + + +**** RUNNING THE KERNEL + +The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is +located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode +kernel. This means that if you loaded your real-mode kernel code at +0x90000, the kernel entry point is 9020:0000. + +At entry, ds = es = ss should point to the start of the real-mode +kernel code (0x9000 if the code is loaded at 0x90000), sp should be +set up properly, normally pointing to the top of the heap, and +interrupts should be disabled. Furthermore, to guard against bugs in +the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds = +es = ss. + +In our example from above, we would do: + + /* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must + be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */ + + seg = base_ptr >> 4; + + cli(); /* Enter with interrupts disabled! */ + + /* Set up the real-mode kernel stack */ + _SS = seg; + _SP = heap_end; + + _DS = _ES = _FS = _GS = seg; + jmp_far(seg+0x20, 0); /* Run the kernel */ + +If your boot sector accesses a floppy drive, it is recommended to +switch off the floppy motor before running the kernel, since the +kernel boot leaves interrupts off and thus the motor will not be +switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as +a demand-loaded module! + + +**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS + +If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as +LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the +standard memory location requirements. Such a boot loader may use the +following hooks that, if set, are invoked by the kernel at the +appropriate time. The use of these hooks should probably be +considered an absolutely last resort! + +IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and +%edi across invocation. + + realmode_swtch: + A 16-bit real mode far subroutine invoked immediately before + entering protected mode. The default routine disables NMI, so + your routine should probably do so, too. + + code32_start: + A 32-bit flat-mode routine *jumped* to immediately after the + transition to protected mode, but before the kernel is + uncompressed. No segments, except CS, are guaranteed to be + set up (current kernels do, but older ones do not); you should + set them up to BOOT_DS (0x18) yourself. + + After completing your hook, you should jump to the address + that was in this field before your boot loader overwrote it + (relocated, if appropriate.) + + +**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL + +For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI, +LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel +based on legacy BIOS can not be used, so a 32-bit boot protocol needs +to be defined. + +In 32-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel +should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params, +traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params +should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header +from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct +boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as +follow: + + 0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201 + +In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct +boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should +also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that +described in zero-page.txt. + +After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the +32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol. + +In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the +32-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded +32/64-bit kernel. + +At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging +disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors +__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat +segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS +must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS +must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base +address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 147bfe511cdd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,900 +0,0 @@ - THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL - --------------------------- - -On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot -convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as -well as the desire in the early days to have the kernel itself be a -bootable image, the complicated PC memory model and due to changed -expectations in the PC industry caused by the effective demise of -real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system. - -Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist. - -Old kernels: zImage/Image support only. Some very early kernels - may not even support a command line. - -Protocol 2.00: (Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as - well as a formalized way to communicate between the - boot loader and the kernel. setup.S made relocatable, - although the traditional setup area still assumed - writable. - -Protocol 2.01: (Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning. - -Protocol 2.02: (Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol. - Lower the conventional memory ceiling. No overwrite - of the traditional setup area, thus making booting - safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit - BIOS entry points. zImage deprecated but still - supported. - -Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible - initrd address available to the bootloader. - -Protocol 2.04: (Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes. - -Protocol 2.05: (Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable. - Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields. - -Protocol 2.06: (Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of - the boot command line. - -Protocol 2.07: (Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol. - Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data - and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags. - -Protocol 2.08: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format - payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length - fields to aid in locating the payload. - -Protocol 2.09: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical - pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data. - -**** MEMORY LAYOUT - -The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or -zImage kernels, typically looks like: - - | | -0A0000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA. -09A000 +------------------------+ - | Command line | - | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. -098000 +------------------------+ - | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. -090200 +------------------------+ - | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. -090000 +------------------------+ - | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image. -010000 +------------------------+ - | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 -001000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | -000800 +------------------------+ - | Typically used by MBR | -000600 +------------------------+ - | BIOS use only | -000000 +------------------------+ - - -When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to -0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector, -setup, and stack/heap) was made relocatable to any address between -0x10000 and end of low memory. Unfortunately, in protocols 2.00 and -2.01 the 0x90000+ memory range is still used internally by the kernel; -the 2.02 protocol resolves that problem. - -It is desirable to keep the "memory ceiling" -- the highest point in -low memory touched by the boot loader -- as low as possible, since -some newer BIOSes have begun to allocate some rather large amounts of -memory, called the Extended BIOS Data Area, near the top of low -memory. The boot loader should use the "INT 12h" BIOS call to verify -how much low memory is available. - -Unfortunately, if INT 12h reports that the amount of memory is too -low, there is usually nothing the boot loader can do but to report an -error to the user. The boot loader should therefore be designed to -take up as little space in low memory as it reasonably can. For -zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the -0x90000 segment, the boot loader should make sure not to use memory -above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point. - -For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a -memory layout like the following is suggested: - - ~ ~ - | Protected-mode kernel | -100000 +------------------------+ - | I/O memory hole | -0A0000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused - ~ ~ - | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark) -X+10000 +------------------------+ - | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. -X+08000 +------------------------+ - | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. - | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. -X +------------------------+ - | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 -001000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | -000800 +------------------------+ - | Typically used by MBR | -000600 +------------------------+ - | BIOS use only | -000000 +------------------------+ - -... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader -permits. - - -**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER - -In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a -sector" refers to 512 bytes. It is independent of the actual sector -size of the underlying medium. - -The first step in loading a Linux kernel should be to load the -real-mode code (boot sector and setup code) and then examine the -following header at offset 0x01f1. The real-mode code can total up to -32K, although the boot loader may choose to load only the first two -sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size. - -The header looks like: - -Offset Proto Name Meaning -/Size - -01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors -01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly -01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras -01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only -01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control -01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number -01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number -0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction -0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS" -0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported -0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below) -020C/2 2.00+ start_sys The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete) -020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string -0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier -0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags -0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size (used with hooks) -0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below) -0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader) -021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader) -0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only -0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end -0226/2 N/A pad1 Unused -0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line -022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address -0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel -0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not -0235/3 N/A pad2 Unused -0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line -023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture -0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data -0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload -024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload -0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list - of struct setup_data - -(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the - real value is 4. - -(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize - field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel - cannot be determined. - -If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, -the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the -following parameters should be assumed: - - Image type = zImage - initrd not supported - Real-mode kernel must be located at 0x90000. - -Otherwise, the "version" field contains the protocol version, -e.g. protocol version 2.01 will contain 0x0201 in this field. When -setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields -supported by the protocol version in use. - - -**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS - -For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader -("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader -("write"), and some are expected to be read and modified by the -bootloader ("modify"). - -All general purpose boot loaders should write the fields marked -(obligatory). Boot loaders who want to load the kernel at a -nonstandard address should fill in the fields marked (reloc); other -boot loaders can ignore those fields. - -The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.) - -Field name: setup_sects -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1f1/1 -Protocol: ALL - - The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors. If this field is - 0, the real value is 4. The real-mode code consists of the boot - sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code. - -Field name: root_flags -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x1f2/2 -Protocol: ALL - - If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly. The use of - this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the - command line instead. - -Field name: syssize -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL) -Protocol: 2.04+ - - The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs. - For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes - wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if - the LOAD_HIGH flag is set. - -Field name: ram_size -Type: kernel internal -Offset/size: 0x1f8/2 -Protocol: ALL - - This field is obsolete. - -Field name: vid_mode -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x1fa/2 - - Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS. - -Field name: root_dev -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x1fc/2 -Protocol: ALL - - The default root device device number. The use of this field is - deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead. - -Field name: boot_flag -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1fe/2 -Protocol: ALL - - Contains 0xAA55. This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have - to a magic number. - -Field name: jump -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x200/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset - relative to byte 0x202. This can be used to determine the size of - the header. - -Field name: header -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x202/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448). - -Field name: version -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x206/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format, - e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version - 10.17. - -Field name: readmode_swtch -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x208/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) - -Field name: start_sys -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20c/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. - -Field name: kernel_version -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20e/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated - human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200. This can - be used to display the kernel version to the user. This value - should be less than (0x200*setup_sects). - - For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version - number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file. - This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field - contains the value 15 or higher, as: - - 0x1c00 < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but - 0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00) - - 0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15. - -Field name: type_of_loader -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x210/1 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter - 0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is - a version number. Otherwise, enter 0xFF here. - - Assigned boot loader ids: - 0 LILO (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader) - 1 Loadlin - 2 bootsect-loader (0x20, all other values reserved) - 3 SYSLINUX - 4 EtherBoot - 5 ELILO - 7 GRuB - 8 U-BOOT - 9 Xen - A Gujin - B Qemu - - Please contact if you need a bootloader ID - value assigned. - -Field name: loadflags -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x211/1 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - This field is a bitmask. - - Bit 0 (read): LOADED_HIGH - - If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000. - - If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000. - - Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG - - If 0, print early messages. - - If 1, suppress early messages. - This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early - kernel) to not write early messages that require - accessing the display hardware directly. - - Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS - Protocol: 2.07+ - - If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. - - If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. - Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with - a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment). - - Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP - Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the - heap_end_ptr is valid. If this field is clear, some setup code - functionality will be disabled. - -Field name: setup_move_size -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x212/2 -Protocol: 2.00-2.01 - - When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not - loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading - sequence. Fill in this field if you want additional data (such as - the kernel command line) moved in addition to the real-mode kernel - itself. - - The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector. - - This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or - if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000. - -Field name: code32_start -Type: modify (optional, reloc) -Offset/size: 0x214/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The address to jump to in protected mode. This defaults to the load - address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to - determine the proper load address. - - This field can be modified for two purposes: - - 1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) - - 2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a - relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify - this field to point to the load address. - -Field name: ramdisk_image -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x218/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at - zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs. - -Field name: ramdisk_size -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x21c/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at zero if there is no - initial ramdisk/ramfs. - -Field name: bootsect_kludge -Type: kernel internal -Offset/size: 0x220/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - This field is obsolete. - -Field name: heap_end_ptr -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x224/2 -Protocol: 2.01+ - - Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode - code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200. - -Field name: cmd_line_ptr -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x228/4 -Protocol: 2.02+ - - Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line. - The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of - the setup heap and 0xA0000; it does not have to be located in the - same 64K segment as the real-mode code itself. - - Fill in this field even if your boot loader does not support a - command line, in which case you can point this to an empty string - (or better yet, to the string "auto".) If this field is left at - zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support - the 2.02+ protocol. - -Field name: initrd_addr_max -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x22c/4 -Protocol: 2.03+ - - The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial - ramdisk/ramfs contents. For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this - field is not present, and the maximum address is 0x37FFFFFF. (This - address is defined as the address of the highest safe byte, so if - your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is - 0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.) - -Field name: kernel_alignment -Type: read (reloc) -Offset/size: 0x230/4 -Protocol: 2.05+ - - Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is true.) - -Field name: relocatable_kernel -Type: read (reloc) -Offset/size: 0x234/1 -Protocol: 2.05+ - - If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can - be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field. - After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to - point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook. - -Field name: cmdline_size -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x238/4 -Protocol: 2.06+ - - The maximum size of the command line without the terminating - zero. This means that the command line can contain at most - cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the - maximum size was 255. - -Field name: hardware_subarch -Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC) -Offset/size: 0x23c/4 -Protocol: 2.07+ - - In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural - pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and - accessing process control registers needs to be done differently. - - This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one - one of those environments. - - 0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment - 0x00000001 lguest - 0x00000002 Xen - -Field name: hardware_subarch_data -Type: write (subarch-dependent) -Offset/size: 0x240/8 -Protocol: 2.07+ - - A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch - This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment, - do not modify. - -Field name: payload_offset -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x248/4 -Protocol: 2.08+ - - If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the - real-mode code to the payload. - - The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and - uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic - numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used. - -Field name: payload_length -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x24c/4 -Protocol: 2.08+ - - The length of the payload. - -Field name: setup_data -Type: write (special) -Offset/size: 0x250/8 -Protocol: 2.09+ - - The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of - struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot - parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is - as follow: - - struct setup_data { - u64 next; - u32 type; - u32 len; - u8 data[0]; - }; - - Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of - linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used - to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data - field; the data holds the real payload. - - This list may be modified at a number of points during the bootup - process. Therefore, when modifying this list one should always make - sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains - entries. - - -**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM - -From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over -the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an -initial remainder of 0xffffffff. The checksum is appended to the -file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the -syssize field of the header is always 0. - - -**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE - -The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot -loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also -relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" -below. - -The kernel command line is a null-terminated string. The maximum -length can be retrieved from the field cmdline_size. Before protocol -version 2.06, the maximum was 255 characters. A string that is too -long will be automatically truncated by the kernel. - -If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the -kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see -above.) This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup -heap and 0xA0000. - -If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel -command line is entered using the following protocol: - - At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic - number 0xA33F. - - At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset - of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the - real-mode kernel). - - The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region - covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this - field. - - -**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE - -The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as -memory allocated for the kernel command line. This needs to be done -in the real-mode accessible memory in bottom megabyte. - -It should be noted that modern machines often have a sizable Extended -BIOS Data Area (EBDA). As a result, it is advisable to use as little -of the low megabyte as possible. - -Unfortunately, under the following circumstances the 0x90000 memory -segment has to be used: - - - When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0). - - When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel. - - -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code - can be loaded at another address, but it is internally - relocated to 0x90000. For the "old" protocol, the - real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000. - -When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000. - -For boot protocol 2.02 or higher, the command line does not have to be -located in the same 64K segment as the real-mode setup code; it is -thus permitted to give the stack/heap the full 64K segment and locate -the command line above it. - -The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode -code, nor should it be located in high memory. - - -**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION - -As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real -mode segment: - - When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment: - - 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel - 0x8000-0xdfff Stack and heap - 0xe000-0xffff Kernel command line - - When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier: - - 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel - 0x8000-0x97ff Stack and heap - 0x9800-0x9fff Kernel command line - -Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header: - - unsigned long base_ptr; /* base address for real-mode segment */ - - if ( setup_sects == 0 ) { - setup_sects = 4; - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0200 ) { - type_of_loader = ; - if ( loading_initrd ) { - ramdisk_image = ; - ramdisk_size = ; - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0202 && loadflags & 0x01 ) - heap_end = 0xe000; - else - heap_end = 0x9800; - - if ( protocol >= 0x0201 ) { - heap_end_ptr = heap_end - 0x200; - loadflags |= 0x80; /* CAN_USE_HEAP */ - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0202 ) { - cmd_line_ptr = base_ptr + heap_end; - strcpy(cmd_line_ptr, cmdline); - } else { - cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; - cmd_line_offset = heap_end; - setup_move_size = heap_end + strlen(cmdline)+1; - strcpy(base_ptr+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); - } - } else { - /* Very old kernel */ - - heap_end = 0x9800; - - cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; - cmd_line_offset = heap_end; - - /* A very old kernel MUST have its real-mode code - loaded at 0x90000 */ - - if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) { - /* Copy the real-mode kernel */ - memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512); - base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */ - } - - strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); - - /* It is recommended to clear memory up to the 32K mark */ - memset(0x90000 + (setup_sects+1)*512, 0, - (64-(setup_sects+1))*512); - } - - -**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL - -The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 -in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) -It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and -0x100000 for bzImage kernels. - -The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 -bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set: - - is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01); - load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000; - -Note that Image/zImage kernels can be up to 512K in size, and thus use -the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory. This means it is pretty -much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at -0x90000. bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility. - - -**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS - -If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the -user, the user may expect the following command line options to work. -They should normally not be deleted from the kernel command line even -though not all of them are actually meaningful to the kernel. Boot -loader authors who need additional command line options for the boot -loader itself should get them registered in -Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt to make sure they will not -conflict with actual kernel options now or in the future. - - vga= - here is either an integer (in C notation, either - decimal, octal, or hexadecimal) or one of the strings - "normal" (meaning 0xFFFF), "ext" (meaning 0xFFFE) or "ask" - (meaning 0xFFFD). This value should be entered into the - vid_mode field, as it is used by the kernel before the command - line is parsed. - - mem= - is an integer in C notation optionally followed by - (case insensitive) K, M, G, T, P or E (meaning << 10, << 20, - << 30, << 40, << 50 or << 60). This specifies the end of - memory to the kernel. This affects the possible placement of - an initrd, since an initrd should be placed near end of - memory. Note that this is an option to *both* the kernel and - the bootloader! - - initrd= - An initrd should be loaded. The meaning of is - obviously bootloader-dependent, and some boot loaders - (e.g. LILO) do not have such a command. - -In addition, some boot loaders add the following options to the -user-specified command line: - - BOOT_IMAGE= - The boot image which was loaded. Again, the meaning of - is obviously bootloader-dependent. - - auto - The kernel was booted without explicit user intervention. - -If these options are added by the boot loader, it is highly -recommended that they are located *first*, before the user-specified -or configuration-specified command line. Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh" -gets confused by the "auto" option. - - -**** RUNNING THE KERNEL - -The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is -located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode -kernel. This means that if you loaded your real-mode kernel code at -0x90000, the kernel entry point is 9020:0000. - -At entry, ds = es = ss should point to the start of the real-mode -kernel code (0x9000 if the code is loaded at 0x90000), sp should be -set up properly, normally pointing to the top of the heap, and -interrupts should be disabled. Furthermore, to guard against bugs in -the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds = -es = ss. - -In our example from above, we would do: - - /* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must - be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */ - - seg = base_ptr >> 4; - - cli(); /* Enter with interrupts disabled! */ - - /* Set up the real-mode kernel stack */ - _SS = seg; - _SP = heap_end; - - _DS = _ES = _FS = _GS = seg; - jmp_far(seg+0x20, 0); /* Run the kernel */ - -If your boot sector accesses a floppy drive, it is recommended to -switch off the floppy motor before running the kernel, since the -kernel boot leaves interrupts off and thus the motor will not be -switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as -a demand-loaded module! - - -**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS - -If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as -LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the -standard memory location requirements. Such a boot loader may use the -following hooks that, if set, are invoked by the kernel at the -appropriate time. The use of these hooks should probably be -considered an absolutely last resort! - -IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and -%edi across invocation. - - realmode_swtch: - A 16-bit real mode far subroutine invoked immediately before - entering protected mode. The default routine disables NMI, so - your routine should probably do so, too. - - code32_start: - A 32-bit flat-mode routine *jumped* to immediately after the - transition to protected mode, but before the kernel is - uncompressed. No segments, except CS, are guaranteed to be - set up (current kernels do, but older ones do not); you should - set them up to BOOT_DS (0x18) yourself. - - After completing your hook, you should jump to the address - that was in this field before your boot loader overwrote it - (relocated, if appropriate.) - - -**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL - -For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI, -LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel -based on legacy BIOS can not be used, so a 32-bit boot protocol needs -to be defined. - -In 32-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel -should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params, -traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params -should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header -from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct -boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as -follow: - - 0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201 - -In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct -boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should -also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that -described in zero-page.txt. - -After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the -32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol. - -In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the -32-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded -32/64-bit kernel. - -At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging -disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors -__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat -segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS -must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS -must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base -address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1894cdfc69d9..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -USB Legacy support -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Vojtech Pavlik , January 2004 - - -Also known as "USB Keyboard" or "USB Mouse support" in the BIOS Setup is a -feature that allows one to use the USB mouse and keyboard as if they were -their classic PS/2 counterparts. This means one can use an USB keyboard to -type in LILO for example. - -It has several drawbacks, though: - -1) On some machines, the emulated PS/2 mouse takes over even when no USB - mouse is present and a real PS/2 mouse is present. In that case the extra - features (wheel, extra buttons, touchpad mode) of the real PS/2 mouse may - not be available. - -2) If CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G is enabled, the PS/2 mouse emulation can cause - system crashes, because the SMM BIOS is not expecting to be in PAE mode. - The Intel E7505 is a typical machine where this happens. - -3) If AMD64 64-bit mode is enabled, again system crashes often happen, - because the SMM BIOS isn't expecting the CPU to be in 64-bit mode. The - BIOS manufacturers only test with Windows, and Windows doesn't do 64-bit - yet. - -Solutions: - -Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the -PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into -the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be -compiled-in, too. - -Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G -in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update -could help, but so far no such update exists. - -Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board -manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB -Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding -idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM -on the HLT instruction as well. - diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 169ad423a3d1..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot -protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit -real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly -are in: - - include/asm-x86/bootparam.h - - -Offset Proto Name Meaning -/Size - -000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information - (struct screen_info) -040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info) -060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information - (struct ist_info) -080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! -090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! -0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table (struct sys_desc_table) -140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info) -1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info) -1E0/004 ALL alk_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB -1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code -1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_map (below) -1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below) -1EA/001 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer - (below) -290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures -2D0/A00 ALL e820_map E820 memory map table - (array of struct e820entry) -D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info) diff --git a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1894cdfc69d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +USB Legacy support +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Vojtech Pavlik , January 2004 + + +Also known as "USB Keyboard" or "USB Mouse support" in the BIOS Setup is a +feature that allows one to use the USB mouse and keyboard as if they were +their classic PS/2 counterparts. This means one can use an USB keyboard to +type in LILO for example. + +It has several drawbacks, though: + +1) On some machines, the emulated PS/2 mouse takes over even when no USB + mouse is present and a real PS/2 mouse is present. In that case the extra + features (wheel, extra buttons, touchpad mode) of the real PS/2 mouse may + not be available. + +2) If CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G is enabled, the PS/2 mouse emulation can cause + system crashes, because the SMM BIOS is not expecting to be in PAE mode. + The Intel E7505 is a typical machine where this happens. + +3) If AMD64 64-bit mode is enabled, again system crashes often happen, + because the SMM BIOS isn't expecting the CPU to be in 64-bit mode. The + BIOS manufacturers only test with Windows, and Windows doesn't do 64-bit + yet. + +Solutions: + +Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the +PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into +the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be +compiled-in, too. + +Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G +in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update +could help, but so far no such update exists. + +Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board +manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB +Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding +idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM +on the HLT instruction as well. + diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..169ad423a3d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot +protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit +real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly +are in: + + include/asm-x86/bootparam.h + + +Offset Proto Name Meaning +/Size + +000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information + (struct screen_info) +040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info) +060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information + (struct ist_info) +080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! +090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! +0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table (struct sys_desc_table) +140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info) +1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info) +1E0/004 ALL alk_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB +1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code +1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_map (below) +1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below) +1EA/001 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer + (below) +290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures +2D0/A00 ALL e820_map E820 memory map table + (array of struct e820entry) +D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info) -- cgit v1.2.2 From a021e5124a6c57325ffb02a60cd1d5f40342f8aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "H. Peter Anvin" Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 15:33:57 -0400 Subject: x86: doc: boot.txt: fix the size of the start_sys field The start_sys field is two bytes, not four. Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 147bfe511cdd..83c0033ee9e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+ Field name: start_sys Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20c/4 +Offset/size: 0x20c/2 Protocol: 2.00+ The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. -- cgit v1.2.2 From a300bec952127d9a15e666b391bb35c9aecb3002 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 09:46:13 -0700 Subject: documentation: move hpet.txt to timers/ subdirectory Move hpet.txt to Documentation/timers/ subdirectory. Add 00-INDEX to Documentation/timers/ subdirectory. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: tglx Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner --- Documentation/00-INDEX | 2 - Documentation/hpet.txt | 300 ------------------------------------------ Documentation/timers/00-INDEX | 10 ++ Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 300 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 4 files changed, 310 insertions(+), 302 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/hpet.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/hpet.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 1977fab38656..6c40c4c300d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -161,8 +161,6 @@ hayes-esp.txt - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver. highuid.txt - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs. -hpet.txt - - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux. timers/ - info on the timer related topics hw_random.txt diff --git a/Documentation/hpet.txt b/Documentation/hpet.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6ad52d9dad6c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/hpet.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux - -The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement -for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. -Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the -first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. -A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at -. - -The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization -of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables -platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET -initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in -arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. - -The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in -the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. -An example user space program is provided below. - -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - - -extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_info(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_read(int, const char **); - -#include -#include -#include - -struct hpet_command { - char *command; - void (*func)(int argc, const char ** argv); -} hpet_command[] = { - { - "open-close", - hpet_open_close - }, - { - "info", - hpet_info - }, - { - "poll", - hpet_poll - }, - { - "fasync", - hpet_fasync - }, -}; - -int -main(int argc, const char ** argv) -{ - int i; - - argc--; - argv++; - - if (!argc) { - fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n"); - return -1; - } - - - for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++) - if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) { - argc--; - argv++; - fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n", - hpet_command[i].command); - hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv); - return 0; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]); - - return -1; -} - -void -hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - int fd; - - if (argc != 1) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n"); - return; - } - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - if (fd < 0) - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n"); - else - close(fd); - - return; -} - -void -hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv) -{ -} - -void -hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - unsigned long freq; - int iterations, i, fd; - struct pollfd pfd; - struct hpet_info info; - struct timeval stv, etv; - struct timezone tz; - long usec; - - if (argc != 3) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n"); - return; - } - - freq = atoi(argv[1]); - iterations = atoi(argv[2]); - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - - if (fd < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]); - return; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n"); - goto out; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); - - if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - pfd.fd = fd; - pfd.events = POLLIN; - - for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { - pfd.revents = 0; - gettimeofday(&stv, &tz); - if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0) - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n"); - else { - long data; - - gettimeofday(&etv, &tz); - usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec; - usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec; - - fprintf(stderr, - "hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec); - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n", - pfd.revents); - - if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n"); - } - else - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n", - data); - } - } - -out: - close(fd); - return; -} - -static int hpet_sigio_count; - -static void -hpet_sigio(int val) -{ - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n"); - hpet_sigio_count++; -} - -void -hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - unsigned long freq; - int iterations, i, fd, value; - sig_t oldsig; - struct hpet_info info; - - hpet_sigio_count = 0; - fd = -1; - - if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n"); - return; - } - - if (argc != 3) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n"); - goto out; - } - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - - if (fd < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]); - return; - } - - - if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) || - ((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) || - (fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - freq = atoi(argv[1]); - iterations = atoi(argv[2]); - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n"); - goto out; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); - - if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { - (void) pause(); - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count); - } - -out: - signal(SIGIO, oldsig); - - if (fd >= 0) - close(fd); - - return; -} - -The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: - - hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) - hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) - hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) - -The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data -members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. -hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same -commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister -is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..397dc35e1323 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +highres.txt + - High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes +hpet.txt + - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux +hrtimers.txt + - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers +timer_stats.txt + - timer usage statistics diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6ad52d9dad6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,300 @@ + High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux + +The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement +for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. +Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the +first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. +A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at +. + +The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization +of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables +platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET +initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in +arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. + +The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in +the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. +An example user space program is provided below. + +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + + +extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_info(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_read(int, const char **); + +#include +#include +#include + +struct hpet_command { + char *command; + void (*func)(int argc, const char ** argv); +} hpet_command[] = { + { + "open-close", + hpet_open_close + }, + { + "info", + hpet_info + }, + { + "poll", + hpet_poll + }, + { + "fasync", + hpet_fasync + }, +}; + +int +main(int argc, const char ** argv) +{ + int i; + + argc--; + argv++; + + if (!argc) { + fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n"); + return -1; + } + + + for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++) + if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) { + argc--; + argv++; + fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n", + hpet_command[i].command); + hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv); + return 0; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]); + + return -1; +} + +void +hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + int fd; + + if (argc != 1) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n"); + return; + } + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n"); + else + close(fd); + + return; +} + +void +hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv) +{ +} + +void +hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + unsigned long freq; + int iterations, i, fd; + struct pollfd pfd; + struct hpet_info info; + struct timeval stv, etv; + struct timezone tz; + long usec; + + if (argc != 3) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n"); + return; + } + + freq = atoi(argv[1]); + iterations = atoi(argv[2]); + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]); + return; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n"); + goto out; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); + + if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + pfd.fd = fd; + pfd.events = POLLIN; + + for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { + pfd.revents = 0; + gettimeofday(&stv, &tz); + if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0) + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n"); + else { + long data; + + gettimeofday(&etv, &tz); + usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec; + usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec; + + fprintf(stderr, + "hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec); + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n", + pfd.revents); + + if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n"); + } + else + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n", + data); + } + } + +out: + close(fd); + return; +} + +static int hpet_sigio_count; + +static void +hpet_sigio(int val) +{ + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n"); + hpet_sigio_count++; +} + +void +hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + unsigned long freq; + int iterations, i, fd, value; + sig_t oldsig; + struct hpet_info info; + + hpet_sigio_count = 0; + fd = -1; + + if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n"); + return; + } + + if (argc != 3) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n"); + goto out; + } + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]); + return; + } + + + if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) || + ((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) || + (fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + freq = atoi(argv[1]); + iterations = atoi(argv[2]); + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n"); + goto out; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); + + if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { + (void) pause(); + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count); + } + +out: + signal(SIGIO, oldsig); + + if (fd >= 0) + close(fd); + + return; +} + +The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: + + hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) + hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) + hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) + +The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data +members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. +hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same +commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister +is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5c05917e7fe313a187ad6ebb94c1c6cf42862a0b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yinghai Lu Date: Thu, 24 Jul 2008 17:29:40 -0700 Subject: x86: usb debug port early console, v4 based on work from Eric, and add some timeout so don't dead loop when debug device is not installed v2: fix checkpatch warning v3: move ehci struct def to linux/usrb/ehci_def.h from host/ehci.h also add CONFIG_EARLY_PRINTK_DBGP to disable it by default v4: address comments from Ingo, seperate ehci reg def moving to another patch also add auto detect port that connect to debug device for Nvidia southbridge Signed-off-by: Yinghai Lu Cc: Andrew Morton Cc: Andi Kleen Cc: "Arjan van de Ven" Cc: "Eric W. Biederman" Cc: "Greg KH" Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index e7bea3e85304..92ddd4afe174 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -657,11 +657,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file earlyprintk= [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN] earlyprintk=vga earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] + earlyprintk=dbgp Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console takes over. - Only vga or serial at a time, not both. + Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time. Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7225e75144b9718cbbe1820d9c011c809d5773fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Sat, 26 Jul 2008 17:54:22 -0700 Subject: documentation: move mtrr.txt to Doc/x86/ subdir Move mtrr.txt to the Documentation/x86/ subdirectory. Add 00-INDEX to the Documentation/x86/ subdirectory. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Adrian Bunk Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/00-INDEX | 2 - Documentation/mtrr.txt | 305 --------------------------------------------- Documentation/x86/00-INDEX | 4 + Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt | 305 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 4 files changed, 309 insertions(+), 307 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/mtrr.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 1977fab38656..661b6ccfe180 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ mono.txt - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. moxa-smartio - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. -mtrr.txt - - how to use PPro Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance. mutex-design.txt - info on the generic mutex subsystem. namespaces/ diff --git a/Documentation/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/mtrr.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c39ac395970e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/mtrr.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,305 +0,0 @@ -MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control -3 Jun 1999 -Richard Gooch - - - On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later) - the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control - processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have - a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining - allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer - before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance - of image write operations 2.5 times or more. - - The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range - Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For - these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs. - - The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two - MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel - style MTRRs. - - The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These - are supported. - - The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs. - - The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used - to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use - this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that - similar control registers on other processors can be easily - supported. - - -There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface -which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl() -interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The -ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The -interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code. - -=============================================================================== -Reading MTRRs from the shell: - -% cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -=============================================================================== -Creating MTRRs from the C-shell: -# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr -or if you use bash: -# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr - -And the result thereof: -% cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1 - -This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To -find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X -server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A -typical line that you may get is: - -(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000 - -Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may -move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is -that reported by the X server. - -To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually -know?), the following line will tell you: - -(--) S3: videoram: 4096k - -That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal). -A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic: -in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the -ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a -commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs. -=============================================================================== -Creating overlapping MTRRs: - -%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr -%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr - -And the results: cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 -reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 - -Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area -excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for -registers. - -NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first -region that you created is type=write-combining. -=============================================================================== -Removing MTRRs from the C-shell: -% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr -or using bash: -% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr -=============================================================================== -Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s: - -/* mtrr-show.c - - Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s) - - Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au - The postal address is: - Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. -*/ - -/* - This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR - settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr. - - - Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 - - Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 - - -*/ -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - -#define TRUE 1 -#define FALSE 0 -#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) - -static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = -{ - "uncachable", /* 0 */ - "write-combining", /* 1 */ - "?", /* 2 */ - "?", /* 3 */ - "write-through", /* 4 */ - "write-protect", /* 5 */ - "write-back", /* 6 */ -}; - -int main () -{ - int fd; - struct mtrr_gentry gentry; - - if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) - { - if (errno == ENOENT) - { - fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", - stderr); - exit (1); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (2); - } - for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0; - ++gentry.regnum) - { - if (gentry.size < 1) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum); - continue; - } - fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n", - gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size, - mtrr_strings[gentry.type]); - } - if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0); - fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (3); -} /* End Function main */ -=============================================================================== -Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s: - -/* mtrr-add.c - - Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl()) - - Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au - The postal address is: - Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. -*/ - -/* - This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first - available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr. - - - Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 - - Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 - - -*/ -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - -#define TRUE 1 -#define FALSE 0 -#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) - -static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = -{ - "uncachable", /* 0 */ - "write-combining", /* 1 */ - "?", /* 2 */ - "?", /* 3 */ - "write-through", /* 4 */ - "write-protect", /* 5 */ - "write-back", /* 6 */ -}; - -int main (int argc, char **argv) -{ - int fd; - struct mtrr_sentry sentry; - - if (argc != 4) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n"); - exit (1); - } - sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0); - sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0); - for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type) - { - if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break; - } - if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]); - exit (2); - } - if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) - { - if (errno == ENOENT) - { - fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", - stderr); - exit (3); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (4); - } - if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (5); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n"); - sleep (5); - close (fd); - fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n", - stderr); -} /* End Function main */ -=============================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dbe3377754af --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +mtrr.txt + - how to use x86 Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cc071dc333c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control +3 Jun 1999 +Richard Gooch + + + On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later) + the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control + processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have + a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining + allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer + before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance + of image write operations 2.5 times or more. + + The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range + Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For + these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs. + + The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two + MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel + style MTRRs. + + The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These + are supported. + + The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs. + + The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used + to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use + this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that + similar control registers on other processors can be easily + supported. + + +There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface +which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl() +interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The +ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The +interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code. + +=============================================================================== +Reading MTRRs from the shell: + +% cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +=============================================================================== +Creating MTRRs from the C-shell: +# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr +or if you use bash: +# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr + +And the result thereof: +% cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1 + +This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To +find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X +server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A +typical line that you may get is: + +(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000 + +Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may +move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is +that reported by the X server. + +To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually +know?), the following line will tell you: + +(--) S3: videoram: 4096k + +That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal). +A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic: +in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the +ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a +commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs. +=============================================================================== +Creating overlapping MTRRs: + +%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr +%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr + +And the results: cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 +reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 + +Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area +excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for +registers. + +NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first +region that you created is type=write-combining. +=============================================================================== +Removing MTRRs from the C-shell: +% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr +or using bash: +% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr +=============================================================================== +Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s: + +/* mtrr-show.c + + Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s) + + Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au + The postal address is: + Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. +*/ + +/* + This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR + settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr. + + + Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 + + Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 + + +*/ +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#define TRUE 1 +#define FALSE 0 +#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) + +static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = +{ + "uncachable", /* 0 */ + "write-combining", /* 1 */ + "?", /* 2 */ + "?", /* 3 */ + "write-through", /* 4 */ + "write-protect", /* 5 */ + "write-back", /* 6 */ +}; + +int main () +{ + int fd; + struct mtrr_gentry gentry; + + if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) + { + if (errno == ENOENT) + { + fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", + stderr); + exit (1); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (2); + } + for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0; + ++gentry.regnum) + { + if (gentry.size < 1) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum); + continue; + } + fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n", + gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size, + mtrr_strings[gentry.type]); + } + if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0); + fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (3); +} /* End Function main */ +=============================================================================== +Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s: + +/* mtrr-add.c + + Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl()) + + Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au + The postal address is: + Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. +*/ + +/* + This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first + available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr. + + + Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 + + Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 + + +*/ +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#define TRUE 1 +#define FALSE 0 +#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) + +static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = +{ + "uncachable", /* 0 */ + "write-combining", /* 1 */ + "?", /* 2 */ + "?", /* 3 */ + "write-through", /* 4 */ + "write-protect", /* 5 */ + "write-back", /* 6 */ +}; + +int main (int argc, char **argv) +{ + int fd; + struct mtrr_sentry sentry; + + if (argc != 4) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n"); + exit (1); + } + sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0); + sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0); + for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type) + { + if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break; + } + if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]); + exit (2); + } + if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) + { + if (errno == ENOENT) + { + fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", + stderr); + exit (3); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (4); + } + if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (5); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n"); + sleep (5); + close (fd); + fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n", + stderr); +} /* End Function main */ +=============================================================================== -- cgit v1.2.2 From 64a76f667d987a559ad0726b4692c987800b22bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Tue, 29 Jul 2008 12:47:38 -0700 Subject: hpet: /dev/hpet - fixes and cleanup Minor /dev/hpet updates and bugfixes: * Remove dead code, mostly remnants of an incomplete/unusable kernel interface ... noted when addressing "sparse" warnings: + hpet_unregister() and a routine it calls + hpet_task and all references, including hpet_task_lock + hpet_data.hd_flags (and HPET_DATA_PLATFORM) * Correct and improve boot message: + displays *counter* (shared between comparators) bit width, not *timer* bit widths (which are often mixed) + relabel "timers" as "comparators"; this is less confusing, they are not independent like normal timers are (sigh) + display MHz not Hz; it's never less than 10 MHz. * Tighten and correct the userspace interface code + don't accidentally program comparators in 64-bit mode using 32-bit values ... always force comparators into 32-bit mode + provide the correct bit definition flagging comparators with periodic capability ... the ABI is unchanged * Update Documentation/hpet.txt + be more correct and current + expand description a bit + don't mention that now-gone kernel interface Plus, add a FIXME comment for something that could cause big trouble on systems with more capable HPETs than at least Intel seems to ship. It seems that few folk use this userspace interface; it's not very usable given the general lack of HPET IRQ routing. I'm told that the only real point of it any more is to mmap for fast timestamps; IMO that's handled better through the gettimeofday() vsyscall. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Acked-by: Clemens Ladisch Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 43 +++++++++++++++++++++---------------------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 22 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt index 6ad52d9dad6c..e7c09abcfab4 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt @@ -1,21 +1,32 @@ High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux -The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement -for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. -Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the -first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. -A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at -. +The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware follows a specification +by Intel and Microsoft which can be found at + + http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm + +Each HPET has one fixed-rate counter (at 10+ MHz, hence "High Precision") +and up to 32 comparators. Normally three or more comparators are provided, +each of which can generate oneshot interupts and at least one of which has +additional hardware to support periodic interrupts. The comparators are +also called "timers", which can be misleading since usually timers are +independent of each other ... these share a counter, complicating resets. + +HPET devices can support two interrupt routing modes. In one mode, the +comparators are additional interrupt sources with no particular system +role. Many x86 BIOS writers don't route HPET interrupts at all, which +prevents use of that mode. They support the other "legacy replacement" +mode where the first two comparators block interrupts from 8254 timers +and from the RTC. The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in -arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. +arch/x86/kernel/hpet.c. -The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in -the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. -An example user space program is provided below. +The driver provides a userspace API which resembles the API found in the +RTC driver framework. An example user space program is provided below. #include #include @@ -286,15 +297,3 @@ out: return; } - -The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: - - hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) - hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) - hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) - -The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data -members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. -hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same -commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister -is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5ef03460a6ffc1d3ee6b6f2abc6765d3e224cf89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 8 Aug 2008 17:06:01 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Introduce snd_BUG_ON() macro Introduced snd_BUG_ON() macro as a replacement of snd_assert() macro. snd_assert() is pretty ugly as it has the control flow in its argument. OTOH, snd_BUG_ON() behaves like a normal conditional, thus it's much easier to read the flow. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- .../sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 41 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 41 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e13c4e67029f..df699e4323ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -6173,6 +6173,47 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. + +
+ <function>snd_BUG_ON()</function> + + snd_BUG_ON() macro is similar with + WARN_ON() macro. For example, + + + + + + + + or it can be used as the condition, + + + + + + + + + + The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate. + When CONFIG_SND_DEBUG, is set, the + expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows + the warning message such as + BUG? (xxx) + normally followed by stack trace. It returns the evaluated + value. + When no CONFIG_SND_DEBUG is set, this + macro always returns zero. + + +
+ -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7cc6dffdae28058f5953fac5743b6abf705d4f05 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 8 Aug 2008 17:14:55 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Kill snd_assert() definition Remove snd_assert() completely now. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- .../sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 29 +--------------------- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 28 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index df699e4323ef..b54cb5048dfa 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -6135,38 +6135,11 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { -
- <function>snd_assert()</function> - - snd_assert() macro is similar with the - normal assert() macro. For example, - - - - - - - - - - The first argument is the expression to evaluate, and the - second argument is the action if it fails. When - CONFIG_SND_DEBUG, is set, it will show an - error message such as BUG? (xxx) - together with stack trace. - - - When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. - -
-
<function>snd_BUG()</function> It shows the BUG? message and - stack trace as well as snd_assert at the point. + stack trace as well as snd_BUG_ON at the point. It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 6ef109050da99952b59397840e9b50cd6611e92a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Beregalov Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 00:10:55 +0400 Subject: ALSA: ALSA-Configuration.txt: supported cards update ALSA-Configuration.txt: supported cards update Signed-off-by: Alexander Beregalov Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 26 ++++++++++++++++++------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index b117e42a6166..dd083b2a5bd3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -746,8 +746,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-hda-intel -------------------- - Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8), - ATI SB450, SB600, RS600, + Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8, ICH9, ICH10, + PCH, SCH), + ATI SB450, SB600, R600, RS600, RS690, RS780, RV610, RV620, + RV630, RV635, RV670, RV770, VIA VT8251/VT8237A, SIS966, ULI M5461 @@ -1166,6 +1168,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Event Electronics, EZ8 * Digigram VX442 * Lionstracs, Mediastaton + * Terrasoniq TS 88 model - Use the given board model, one of the following: delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410, @@ -1200,7 +1203,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * TerraTec Phase 22 * TerraTec Phase 28 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 - * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 XT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HIFI + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HD2 * AudioTrak Prodigy 192 * Pontis MS300 * Albatron K8X800 Pro II @@ -1211,12 +1217,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Shuttle SN25P * Onkyo SE-90PCI * Onkyo SE-200PCI + * ESI Juli@ + * Hercules Fortissimo IV + * EGO-SYS WaveTerminal 192M model - Use the given board model, one of the following: revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt, - prodigy192, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, - k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, - se90pci + prodigy71xt, prodigy71hifi, prodigyhd2, prodigy192, + juli, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, k8x800, + phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, se90pci, + fortissimo4, sn25p, WT192M This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. @@ -1255,7 +1265,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles. * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440 - ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, ESB2 + ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, 6300ESB, ESB2 * SiS 7012 (SiS 735) * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804 CK8, CK8S, MCP501 @@ -1951,6 +1961,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * CHIC True Sound 4Dwave * Shark Predator4D-PCI * Jaton SonicWave 4D + * SiS SI7018 PCI Audio + * Hoontech SoundTrack Digital 4DWave NX pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb) -- cgit v1.2.2 From 8a8f2662c535e1dedced896cc68cb8473fd98fa0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 15:27:43 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Add missing description of usb-audio parameters Added the missing description of module parameters of usb-audio driver to ALSA-Configuration.txt. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index dd083b2a5bd3..68bbc25ff39e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1978,12 +1978,20 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional) pid - Product ID for the device (optional) + nrpacks - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8) + async_unlink - Use async unlink mode (default: yes) device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) - Influence depends on the device - Default: 0x0000 This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. + NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs. + Don't put the value over 20. Changing via sysfs has no sanity + check. + NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for + debugging purpose (if any). + Module snd-usb-caiaq -------------------- -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7a9b8063cf7d78d7de4f2555357101087548c699 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 15:40:53 +0200 Subject: ALSA: usb-audio - Add ignore_ctl_error parameter Added the ignore_ctl_error parameter to enable/disable the control-error handling for mixer interfaces. It was a hard-coded ifdef, and now you can change it more easily. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 68bbc25ff39e..b33e030509fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1983,6 +1983,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) - Influence depends on the device - Default: 0x0000 + ignore_ctl_error - Ignore any USB-controller regarding mixer + interface (default: no) This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. @@ -1991,6 +1993,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. check. NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for debugging purpose (if any). + NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing + the mixer element such as URB error -22. This happens on some + buggy USB device or the controller. Module snd-usb-caiaq -------------------- -- cgit v1.2.2 From 34d7c2b38d124219b7034356716e3455c439acd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Fri, 1 Aug 2008 14:11:05 -0700 Subject: rcu: remove list_for_each_rcu() All of the in-tree uses of list_for_each_rcu() have been converted to list_for_each_entry_rcu(), so list_for_each_rcu() can now be removed. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt | 2 +- Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt | 2 -- 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index cf5562cbe356..6e253407b3dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! number of updates per grace period. 9. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include - rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), + rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(), must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or must be protected by appropriate update-side locks. RCU diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index e04d643a9f57..96170824a717 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -786,8 +786,6 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal: list_for_each_entry_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu - list_for_each_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of - list_for_each_entry_rcu) list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu) -- cgit v1.2.2 From 3f23d815c5049c9d7022226cec2242e384dd0b43 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Sun, 17 Aug 2008 21:44:22 -0700 Subject: security: add/fix security kernel-doc Add security/inode.c functions to the kernel-api docbook. Use '%' on constants in kernel-doc notation. Fix several typos/spellos in security function descriptions. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index b7b1482f6e04..cd0e6d5370d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c Security Framework !Isecurity/security.c +!Esecurity/inode.c -- cgit v1.2.2 From f58e2c33ffa31b8d4a71609a5e71e8d893574a07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Claudio Scordino Date: Wed, 20 Aug 2008 15:18:45 +0200 Subject: sched: new documentation about CFS Rewrite of the CFS documentation - because the old one was sorely out-dated. Signed-off-by: Claudio Scordino Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 371 ++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 218 insertions(+), 153 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index 88bcb8767335..b2aa856339a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -1,151 +1,218 @@ + ============= + CFS Scheduler + ============= -This is the CFS scheduler. - -80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically -models an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. - -"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% -physical power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in -parallel, each at 1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks -running then it runs each at 50% physical power - totally in parallel. - -On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so while that -one task runs, the other tasks that are waiting for the CPU are at a -disadvantage - the current task gets an unfair amount of CPU time. In -CFS this fairness imbalance is expressed and tracked via the per-task -p->wait_runtime (nanosec-unit) value. "wait_runtime" is the amount of -time the task should now run on the CPU for it to become completely fair -and balanced. - -( small detail: on 'ideal' hardware, the p->wait_runtime value would - always be zero - no task would ever get 'out of balance' from the - 'ideal' share of CPU time. ) - -CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->wait_runtime value and it -is thus very simple: it always tries to run the task with the largest -p->wait_runtime value. In other words, CFS tries to run the task with -the 'gravest need' for more CPU time. So CFS always tries to split up -CPU time between runnable tasks as close to 'ideal multitasking -hardware' as possible. - -Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple -concept, with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, -multiprocessing and various algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. - -In practice it works like this: the system runs a task a bit, and when -the task schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is -'accounted for': the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU -is deducted from p->wait_runtime. [minus the 'fair share' it would have -gotten anyway]. Once p->wait_runtime gets low enough so that another -task becomes the 'leftmost task' of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains -(plus a small amount of 'granularity' distance relative to the leftmost -task so that we do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache) then the -new leftmost task is picked and the current task is preempted. - -The rq->fair_clock value tracks the 'CPU time a runnable task would have -fairly gotten, had it been runnable during that time'. So by using -rq->fair_clock values we can accurately timestamp and measure the -'expected CPU time' a task should have gotten. All runnable tasks are -sorted in the rbtree by the "rq->fair_clock - p->wait_runtime" key, and -CFS picks the 'leftmost' task and sticks to it. As the system progresses -forwards, newly woken tasks are put into the tree more and more to the -right - slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the -'leftmost task' and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic amount of -time. - -Some implementation details: - - - the introduction of Scheduling Classes: an extensible hierarchy of - scheduler modules. These modules encapsulate scheduling policy - details and are handled by the scheduler core without the core - code assuming about them too much. - - - sched_fair.c implements the 'CFS desktop scheduler': it is a - replacement for the vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity - code. - - I'd like to give credit to Con Kolivas for the general approach here: - he has proven via RSDL/SD that 'fair scheduling' is possible and that - it results in better desktop scheduling. Kudos Con! - - The CFS patch uses a completely different approach and implementation - from RSDL/SD. My goal was to make CFS's interactivity quality exceed - that of RSDL/SD, which is a high standard to meet :-) Testing - feedback is welcome to decide this one way or another. [ and, in any - case, all of SD's logic could be added via a kernel/sched_sd.c module - as well, if Con is interested in such an approach. ] - - CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use runqueues, it uses a - time-ordered rbtree to build a 'timeline' of future task execution, - and thus has no 'array switch' artifacts (by which both the vanilla - scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). - - CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any - jiffies or other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of - 'timeslices' and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is only one - central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): - - /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns - - which can be used to tune the scheduler from 'desktop' (low - latencies) to 'server' (good batching) workloads. It defaults to a - setting suitable for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the - CFS scheduler module too. - - Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the - 'attacks' that exist today against the heuristics of the stock - scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all - work fine and do not impact interactivity and produce the expected - behavior. - - the CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and - SCHED_BATCH: both types of workloads should be isolated much more - agressively than under the vanilla scheduler. - - ( another detail: due to nanosec accounting and timeline sorting, - sched_yield() support is very simple under CFS, and in fact under - CFS sched_yield() behaves much better than under any other - scheduler i have tested so far. ) - - - sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler - way than the vanilla scheduler does. It uses 100 runqueues (for all - 100 RT priority levels, instead of 140 in the vanilla scheduler) - and it needs no expired array. - - - reworked/sanitized SMP load-balancing: the runqueue-walking - assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and - iterators of the scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got - quite a bit simpler as a result. - - -Group scheduler extension to CFS -================================ - -Normally the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide -fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks -and provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may -be desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system -and then to each task belonging to a user. - -CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets -SCHED_NORMAL/BATCH tasks be be grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such -groups. At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group -tasks for CPU bandwidth control purpose: - - - Based on user id (CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED) - In this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. - - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED) - This options lets the administrator create arbitrary groups - of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See - Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this - filesystem. -Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. +1. OVERVIEW + +CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process +scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23. It is the +replacement for the previous vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity +code. + +80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically models +an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. + +"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% physical +power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in parallel, each at +1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks running, then it runs +each at 50% physical power --- i.e., actually in parallel. + +On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so we have to +introduce the concept of "virtual runtime." The virtual runtime of a task +specifies when its next timeslice would start execution on the ideal +multi-tasking CPU described above. In practice, the virtual runtime of a task +is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks. + + + +2. FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS + +In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task +p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value. This way, it's possible to accurately +timestamp and measure the "expected CPU time" a task should have gotten. + +[ small detail: on "ideal" hardware, at any time all tasks would have the same + p->se.vruntime value --- i.e., tasks would execute simultaneously and no task + would ever get "out of balance" from the "ideal" share of CPU time. ] + +CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->se.vruntime value and it is thus +very simple: it always tries to run the task with the smallest p->se.vruntime +value (i.e., the task which executed least so far). CFS always tries to split +up CPU time between runnable tasks as close to "ideal multitasking hardware" as +possible. + +Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple concept, +with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, multiprocessing and various +algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. + + + +3. THE RBTREE + +CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the +runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future +task execution, and thus has no "array switch" artifacts (by which both the +previous vanilla scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). + +CFS also maintains the rq->cfs.min_vruntime value, which is a monotonic +increasing value tracking the smallest vruntime among all tasks in the +runqueue. The total amount of work done by the system is tracked using +min_vruntime; that value is used to place newly activated entities on the left +side of the tree as much as possible. + +The total number of running tasks in the runqueue is accounted through the +rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the +runqueue. + +CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the +p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to +account for possible wraparounds). CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this +tree and sticks to it. +As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree +more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task +to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic +amount of time. + +Summing up, CFS works like this: it runs a task a bit, and when the task +schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is "accounted +for": the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU is added to +p->se.vruntime. Once p->se.vruntime gets high enough so that another task +becomes the "leftmost task" of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains (plus a +small amount of "granularity" distance relative to the leftmost task so that we +do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache), then the new leftmost task is +picked and the current task is preempted. + + + +4. SOME FEATURES OF CFS + +CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or +other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the +way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is +only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): + + /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns + +which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to +"server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable +for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the CFS scheduler module too. + +Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the "attacks" that +exist today against the heuristics of the stock scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, +chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all work fine and do not impact +interactivity and produce the expected behavior. + +The CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and SCHED_BATCH +than the previous vanilla scheduler: both types of workloads are isolated much +more aggressively. + +SMP load-balancing has been reworked/sanitized: the runqueue-walking +assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and iterators of the +scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got quite a bit simpler as a +result. + + + +5. SCHEDULING CLASSES + +The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling +Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules +encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core +without the core code assuming too much about them. + +sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above. -Group scheduler tunables: +sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than +the previous vanilla scheduler did. It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT +priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no +expired array. -When CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for -each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. +Scheduling classes are implemented through the sched_class structure, which +contains hooks to functions that must be called whenever an interesting event +occurs. + +This is the (partial) list of the hooks: + + - enqueue_task(...) + + Called when a task enters a runnable state. + It puts the scheduling entity (task) into the red-black tree and + increments the nr_running variable. + + - dequeue_tree(...) + + When a task is no longer runnable, this function is called to keep the + corresponding scheduling entity out of the red-black tree. It decrements + the nr_running variable. + + - yield_task(...) + + This function is basically just a dequeue followed by an enqueue, unless the + compat_yield sysctl is turned on; in that case, it places the scheduling + entity at the right-most end of the red-black tree. + + - check_preempt_curr(...) + + This function checks if a task that entered the runnable state should + preempt the currently running task. + + - pick_next_task(...) + + This function chooses the most appropriate task eligible to run next. + + - set_curr_task(...) + + This function is called when a task changes its scheduling class or changes + its task group. + + - task_tick(...) + + This function is mostly called from time tick functions; it might lead to + process switch. This drives the running preemption. + + - task_new(...) + + The core scheduler gives the scheduling module an opportunity to manage new + task startup. The CFS scheduling module uses it for group scheduling, while + the scheduling module for a real-time task does not use it. + + + +6. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS + +Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide +fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and +provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may be +desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system and then to +each task belonging to a user. + +CONFIG_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets tasks to be +grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such groups. + +CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED permits to group real-time (i.e., SCHED_FIFO and +SCHED_RR) tasks. + +CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED permits to group CFS (i.e., SCHED_NORMAL and +SCHED_BATCH) tasks. + +At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group tasks for +CPU bandwidth control purposes: + + - Based on user id (CONFIG_USER_SCHED) + + With this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. + + - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED) + + This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator + create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See + Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem. + +Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. + +When CONFIG_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for each new +user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. # cd /sys/kernel/uids # cat 512/cpu_share # Display user 512's CPU share @@ -155,16 +222,14 @@ each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. 2048 # -CPU bandwidth between two users are divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. -For ex: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user -"guest", then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s -cpu_share is twice "guest"'s cpu_share - +CPU bandwidth between two users is divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. +For example: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user +"guest," then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s cpu_share +is twice "guest"'s cpu_share. -When CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created -for each group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps -below to create task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" -pseudo filesystem +When CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each +group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps below to create +task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem. # mkdir /dev/cpuctl # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl -- cgit v1.2.2 From 59dfc3f8fbabb8681ab4f2fb2df795f9211f40f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com" Date: Wed, 20 Aug 2008 16:45:54 -0700 Subject: x86: PAT documentation updates with debug info Documentation update for PAT. Reflect the latest API details. Also, adds details about ways to get more info in order to debug PAT. Signed-off-by: Venkatesh Pallipadi Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 54 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 45 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index 17965f927c15..c93ff5f4c0dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached, Write-combined and Uncached Minus. + +PAT APIs +-------- + There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available, @@ -26,38 +30,38 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing. API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes | -----------------------|----------|------------|------------------| | | | | -ioremap | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB | | | | | -ioremap_nocache | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC | | | | | -set_memory_uc | UC | -- | -- | +set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | -pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC | +pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- | | | | | pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC | is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | | | | | | -pci proc | -- | -- | UC | +pci proc | -- | -- | UC- | !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | pci proc | -- | -- | WC | PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | read-write | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- | mmap SYNC flag | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC | WB/WC/UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- | and | | ing alias)| ing alias) | any alias to this area| | | | @@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | and | | | | MTRR says WB | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC_MINUS | +/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | | | | no alias to this area | | | | and | | | | @@ -98,3 +102,35 @@ types. Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges. + +PAT debugging +------------- + +With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by + +# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list +PAT memtype list: +uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000 +uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000 + +This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to +access those physical address ranges. + +Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with +"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are +printed to dmesg log. + -- cgit v1.2.2 From b05f78f5c713eda2c34e495d92495ee4f1c3b5e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yinghai Lu Date: Fri, 22 Aug 2008 01:32:50 -0700 Subject: x86_64: printout msr -v2 commandline show_msr=1 for bsp, show_msr=32 for all 32 cpus. [ mingo@elte.hu: added documentation ] Signed-off-by: Yinghai Lu Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 47e7d8794fc6..8679e80b9fc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1852,6 +1852,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file shapers= [NET] Maximal number of shapers. + show_msr= [x86] show boot-time MSR settings + Format: { } + Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings. + The parameter means the number of CPUs to show, + for example 1 means boot CPU only. + sim710= [SCSI,HW] See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c. -- cgit v1.2.2 From a804b574e6c7236222593046fc2b1b8bd0298fce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dominik Brodowski Date: Tue, 29 Jul 2008 08:38:30 +0200 Subject: pcmcia: add pcmcia_loop_config() helper By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a pcmcia driver can iterate over all available configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases. Signed-off-by: Dominik Brodowski --- Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt index 96f155e68750..059934363caf 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt @@ -1,5 +1,11 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors: +* New configuration loop helper (as of 2.6.28) + By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a driver can iterate over all available + configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need + to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and + pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases. + * New release helper (as of 2.6.17) Instead of calling pcmcia_release_{configuration,io,irq,win}, all that's necessary now is calling pcmcia_disable_device. As there is no valid -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9e44c6e40fb383e6b1d0df0c9e375a98e11828d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Mon, 18 Aug 2008 13:53:07 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add AD1882A codec support Added the basic support of AD1882A codec chip. It's almost compatible with AD1882, but with a digital mic and some differences in connections. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index b33e030509fb..02a7194a10cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - AD1882 + AD1882 / AD1882A 3stack 3-stack mode (default) 6stack 6-stack mode -- cgit v1.2.2 From 65eb3dc609dec17deea48dcd4de2e549d29a9824 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kevin Diggs Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 10:26:54 +0200 Subject: sched: add kernel doc for the completion, fix kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt This patch adds kernel doc for the completion feature. An error in the split-man.pl PERL snippet in kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt is also fixed. Signed-off-by: Kevin Diggs Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 0bd32748a467..c6841eee9598 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ if ($#ARGV < 0) { mkdir $ARGV[0],0777; $state = 0; while () { - if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 4 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { + if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 9 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { if ($state == 1) { close OUT } $state = 1; - $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.4"; + $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.9"; print STDERR "Creating $fn\n"; open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n"; print OUT $_; -- cgit v1.2.2 From 93c06cbbf9fea5d5be1778febb7fa9ab1a74e5f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Serge E. Hallyn" Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 14:47:57 -0500 Subject: selinux: add support for installing a dummy policy (v2) In August 2006 I posted a patch generating a minimal SELinux policy. This week, David P. Quigley posted an updated version of that as a patch against the kernel. It also had nice logic for auto-installing the policy. Following is David's original patch intro (preserved especially bc it has stats on the generated policies): se interested in the changes there were only two significant changes. The first is that the iteration through the list of classes used NULL as a sentinel value. The problem with this is that the class_to_string array actually has NULL entries in its table as place holders for the user space object classes. The second change was that it would seem at some point the initial sids table was NULL terminated. This is no longer the case so that iteration has to be done on array length instead of looking for NULL. Some statistics on the policy that it generates: The policy consists of 523 lines which contain no blank lines. Of those 523 lines 453 of them are class, permission, and initial sid definitions. These lines are usually little to no concern to the policy developer since they will not be adding object classes or permissions. Of the remaining 70 lines there is one type, one role, and one user statement. The remaining lines are broken into three portions. The first group are TE allow rules which make up 29 of the remaining lines, the second is assignment of labels to the initial sids which consist of 27 lines, and file system labeling statements which are the remaining 11. In addition to the policy.conf generated there is a single file_contexts file containing two lines which labels the entire system with base_t. This policy generates a policy.23 binary that is 7920 bytes. (then a few versions later...): The new policy is 587 lines (stripped of blank lines) with 476 of those lines being the boilerplate that I mentioned last time. The remaining 111 lines have the 3 lines for type, user, and role, 70 lines for the allow rules (one for each object class including user space object classes), 27 lines to assign types to the initial sids, and 11 lines for file system labeling. The policy binary is 9194 bytes. Changelog: Aug 26: Added Documentation/SELinux.txt Aug 26: Incorporated a set of comments by Stephen Smalley: 1. auto-setup SELINUXTYPE=dummy 2. don't auto-install if selinux is enabled with non-dummy policy 3. don't re-compute policy version 4. /sbin/setfiles not /usr/sbin/setfiles Aug 22: As per JMorris comments, made sure make distclean cleans up the mdp directory. Removed a check for file_contexts which is now created in the same file as the check, making it superfluous. Signed-off-by: Serge Hallyn Signed-off-by: David Quigley Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/SELinux.txt | 27 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 27 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/SELinux.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/SELinux.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..07eae00f3314 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/SELinux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want +to use the distro-provided policies, or install the +latest reference policy release from + http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy + +However, if you want to install a dummy policy for +testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under +scripts/selinux. Note that this requires the selinux +userspace to be installed - in particular you will +need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and +fixfiles to label the filesystem. + + 1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled. + 2. Type 'make' to compile mdp. + 3. Make sure that you are not running with + SELinux enabled and a real policy. If + you are, reboot with selinux disabled + before continuing. + 4. Run install_policy.sh: + cd scripts/selinux + sh install_policy.sh + +Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your +kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type. +It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to +dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy +as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 1befdefcf476d5eb2fb4243fdf4d996a376708b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino" Date: Thu, 28 Aug 2008 11:00:07 -0300 Subject: x86: remove 8254 timer texts from Documentation Commit ecd29476ae0143b1c3641edfa76c0fc3e9ad3021 removed the "disable_8254_timer" and "enable_8254_timer" kernel parameters from the kernel but did not remove the references to them from two files in the Documentation directory: kernel-parameters.txt and x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt. This change completes the removal. Signed-off-by: Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino Acked-by: Maciej W. Rozycki Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ------ Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 4 ---- 2 files changed, 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index a8976467a983..53b0a8f5b23b 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -463,12 +463,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Range: 0 - 8192 Default: 64 - disable_8254_timer - enable_8254_timer - [IA32/X86_64] Disable/Enable interrupt 0 timer routing - over the 8254 in addition to over the IO-APIC. The - kernel tries to set a sensible default. - hpet= [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage Format: { enable (default) | disable | force } disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index b0c7b6c4abda..72ffb5373ec7 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ APICs apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally broken. - disable_8254_timer / enable_8254_timer - Enable interrupt 0 timer routing over the 8254 in addition to over - the IO-APIC. The kernel tries to set a sensible default. - Early Console syntax: earlyprintk=vga -- cgit v1.2.2 From 2922c9aff22ea65f33a891af894331f0f883d127 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 18:12:42 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add descriptions of missing model values Added the descriptions of missing model values. Also, fixed the model strings of a few new models to a standard style. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 02a7194a10cb..374cfc02b2f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -809,6 +809,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC260 hp HP machines hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) + hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 acer Acer TravelMate will Will laptops (PB V7900) @@ -830,8 +831,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD + toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 + nec NEC Versa S9100 basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) @@ -840,6 +843,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 3stack 3-stack model toshiba Toshiba A205 acer Acer laptops + acer-aspire Acer Aspire One dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) zepto Zepto laptops test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can @@ -849,6 +853,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC269 basic Basic preset + quanta Quanta FL1 + eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A + eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 ALC662/663 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF @@ -858,10 +865,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 + ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo m51va ASUS M51VA g71v ASUS G71V h13 ASUS H13 g50v ASUS G50V + asus-mode1 ASUS + asus-mode2 ASUS + asus-mode3 ASUS + asus-mode4 ASUS + asus-mode5 ASUS + asus-mode6 ASUS auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC882/885 @@ -893,12 +907,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 + lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky haier-w66 Haier W66 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) mitac Mitac 8252D clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 + 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC861/660 -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9f99a6386eb1ad1197a401495669315de2f19039 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hiroshi Miura Date: Thu, 28 Aug 2008 16:09:06 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add support of Toshiba RX1 Added the support of Toshiba RX1 laptop with ALC262 codec chip. Related ALSA bug#3386: https://bugtrack.alsa-project.org/alsa-bug/view.php?id=3386 Signed-off-by: Hiroshi Miura Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 374cfc02b2f9..fd3de679386f 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -832,6 +832,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 + toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 nec NEC Versa S9100 -- cgit v1.2.2 From 759ee81be6d87c150ea2b300c221b4fec8b5f646 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "David S. Miller" Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 00:33:26 -0700 Subject: alsa: Remove special SBUS dma support code. No longer used. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e13c4e67029f..56723b42813e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -5073,8 +5073,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { with SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS type and the snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL) device pointer, where GFP_KERNEL is the kernel allocation flag to - use. For the SBUS, SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_SBUS and - snd_dma_sbus_data(sbus_dev) are used instead. + use. For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG with snd_dma_pci_data(pci) -- cgit v1.2.2 From 0c0db98b50ed1217c0dbf4051722034ba314d06e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "David S. Miller" Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 19:59:48 -0700 Subject: sparc: Remove Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt None of the text in this document is relevant any more. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt | 309 ----------------------------------- 1 file changed, 309 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt deleted file mode 100644 index eb1e28ad8822..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,309 +0,0 @@ - - Writing SBUS Drivers - - David S. Miller (davem@redhat.com) - - The SBUS driver interfaces of the Linux kernel have been -revamped completely for 2.4.x for several reasons. Foremost were -performance and complexity concerns. This document details these -new interfaces and how they are used to write an SBUS device driver. - - SBUS drivers need to include to get access -to functions and structures described here. - - Probing and Detection - - Each SBUS device inside the machine is described by a -structure called "struct sbus_dev". Likewise, each SBUS bus -found in the system is described by a "struct sbus_bus". For -each SBUS bus, the devices underneath are hung in a tree-like -fashion off of the bus structure. - - The SBUS device structure contains enough information -for you to implement your device probing algorithm and obtain -the bits necessary to run your device. The most commonly -used members of this structure, and their typical usage, -will be detailed below. - - Here is a piece of skeleton code for performing a device -probe in an SBUS driver under Linux: - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL); - - if (!mp) - return -ENODEV; - - ... - dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp); - return 0; - ... - } - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev, - const struct of_device_id *match) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_probe_one(sdev); - } - - static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp); - } - - static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = { - { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - {}, - }; - - MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match); - - static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = { - .match_table = mydevice_match, - .probe = mydevice_probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove), - .driver = { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - }; - - static int __init mydevice_init(void) - { - return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type); - } - - static void __exit mydevice_exit(void) - { - of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver); - } - - module_init(mydevice_init); - module_exit(mydevice_exit); - - The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which -describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for. In the -simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field. Every -SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will -be passed one-by-one to your .probe method. - - You should store away your device private state structure -pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on -in your .remove method. - - Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered, -etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources -of your device are released by the time it returns. - - You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(), -and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces. They are deprecated, will be -removed, and no new driver should reference them ever. - - Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers - - Each SBUS device structure contains an array of descriptors -which describe each register set. We abuse struct resource for that. -They each correspond to the "reg" properties provided by the OBP firmware. - - Before you can access your device's registers you must map -them. And later if you wish to shutdown your driver (for module -unload or similar) you must unmap them. You must treat them as -a resource, which you allocate (map) before using and free up -(unmap) when you are done with it. - - The mapping information is stored in an opaque value -typed as an "unsigned long". This is the type of the return value -of the mapping interface, and the arguments to the unmapping -interface. Let's say you want to map the first set of registers. -Perhaps part of your driver software state structure looks like: - - struct mydevice { - unsigned long control_regs; - ... - struct sbus_dev *sdev; - ... - }; - - At initialization time you then use the sbus_ioremap -interface to map in your registers, like so: - - static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mydevice *mp; - ... - - mp->control_regs = sbus_ioremap(&sdev->resource[0], 0, - CONTROL_REGS_SIZE, "mydevice regs"); - if (!mp->control_regs) { - /* Failure, cleanup and return. */ - } - } - - Second argument to sbus_ioremap is an offset for -cranky devices with broken OBP PROM. The sbus_ioremap uses only -a start address and flags from the resource structure. -Therefore it is possible to use the same resource to map -several sets of registers or even to fabricate a resource -structure if driver gets physical address from some private place. -This practice is discouraged though. Use whatever OBP PROM -provided to you. - - And here is how you might unmap these registers later at -driver shutdown or module unload time, using the sbus_iounmap -interface: - - static void mydevice_unmap_regs(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_iounmap(mp->control_regs, CONTROL_REGS_SIZE); - } - - Finally, to actually access your registers there are 6 -interface routines at your disposal. Accesses are byte (8 bit), -word (16 bit), or longword (32 bit) sized. Here they are: - - u8 sbus_readb(unsigned long reg) /* read byte */ - u16 sbus_readw(unsigned long reg) /* read word */ - u32 sbus_readl(unsigned long reg) /* read longword */ - void sbus_writeb(u8 value, unsigned long reg) /* write byte */ - void sbus_writew(u16 value, unsigned long reg) /* write word */ - void sbus_writel(u32 value, unsigned long reg) /* write longword */ - - So, let's say your device has a control register of some sort -at offset zero. The following might implement resetting your device: - - #define CONTROL 0x00UL - - #define CONTROL_RESET 0x00000001 /* Reset hardware */ - - static void mydevice_reset(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_writel(CONTROL_RESET, mp->regs + CONTROL); - } - - Or perhaps there is a data port register at an offset of -16 bytes which allows you to read bytes from a fifo in the device: - - #define DATA 0x10UL - - static u8 mydevice_get_byte(struct mydevice *mp) - { - return sbus_readb(mp->regs + DATA); - } - - It's pretty straightforward, and clueful readers may have -noticed that these interfaces mimick the PCI interfaces of the -Linux kernel. This was not by accident. - - WARNING: - - DO NOT try to treat these opaque register mapping - values as a memory mapped pointer to some structure - which you can dereference. - - It may be memory mapped, it may not be. In fact it - could be a physical address, or it could be the time - of day xor'd with 0xdeadbeef. :-) - - Whatever it is, it's an implementation detail. The - interface was done this way to shield the driver - author from such complexities. - - Doing DVMA - - SBUS devices can perform DMA transactions in a way similar -to PCI but dissimilar to ISA, e.g. DMA masters supply address. -In contrast to PCI, however, that address (a bus address) is -translated by IOMMU before a memory access is performed and therefore -it is virtual. Sun calls this procedure DVMA. - - Linux supports two styles of using SBUS DVMA: "consistent memory" -and "streaming DVMA". CPU view of consistent memory chunk is, well, -consistent with a view of a device. Think of it as an uncached memory. -Typically this way of doing DVMA is not very fast and drivers use it -mostly for control blocks or queues. On some CPUs we cannot flush or -invalidate individual pages or cache lines and doing explicit flushing -over ever little byte in every control block would be wasteful. - -Streaming DVMA is a preferred way to transfer large amounts of data. -This process works in the following way: -1. a CPU stops accessing a certain part of memory, - flushes its caches covering that memory; -2. a device does DVMA accesses, then posts an interrupt; -3. CPU invalidates its caches and starts to access the memory. - -A single streaming DVMA operation can touch several discontiguous -regions of a virtual bus address space. This is called a scatter-gather -DVMA. - -[TBD: Why do not we neither Solaris attempt to map disjoint pages -into a single virtual chunk with the help of IOMMU, so that non SG -DVMA masters would do SG? It'd be very helpful for RAID.] - - In order to perform a consistent DVMA a driver does something -like the following: - - char *mem; /* Address in the CPU space */ - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - mem = (char *) sbus_alloc_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, &busa); - - Then mem is used when CPU accesses this memory and u32 -is fed to the device so that it can do DVMA. This is typically -done with an sbus_writel() into some device register. - - Do not forget to free the DVMA resources once you are done: - - sbus_free_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, mem, busa); - - Streaming DVMA is more interesting. First you allocate some -memory suitable for it or pin down some user pages. Then it all works -like this: - - char *mem = argumen1; - unsigned int size = argument2; - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - *mem = 1; /* CPU can access */ - busa = sbus_map_single(sdev, mem, size); - if (busa == 0) ....... - - /* Tell the device to use busa here */ - /* CPU cannot access the memory without sbus_dma_sync_single() */ - - sbus_unmap_single(sdev, busa, size); - if (*mem == 0) .... /* CPU can access again */ - - It is possible to retain mappings and ask the device to -access data again and again without calling sbus_unmap_single. -However, CPU caches must be invalidated with sbus_dma_sync_single -before such access. - -[TBD but what about writeback caches here... do we have any?] - - There is an equivalent set of functions doing the same thing -only with several memory segments at once for devices capable of -scatter-gather transfers. Use the Source, Luke. - - Examples - - drivers/net/sunhme.c - This is a complicated driver which illustrates many concepts -discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards. - - drivers/scsi/esp.c - Check it out for scatter-gather DVMA. - - drivers/sbus/char/bpp.c - A non-DVMA device. - - drivers/net/sunlance.c - Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer. -It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend... -Just check it out and know that it's legal. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 71bb49596bbf4e5a3328e1704d18604e822ba181 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Query supported CCIDs This provides a data structure to record which CCIDs are locally supported and three accessor functions: - a test function for internal use which is used to validate CCID requests made by the user; - a copy function so that the list can be used for feature-negotiation; - documented getsockopt() support so that the user can query capabilities. The data structure is a table which is filled in at compile-time with the list of available CCIDs (which in turn depends on the Kconfig choices). Using the copy function for cloning the list of supported CCIDs is useful for feature negotiation, since the negotiation is now with the full list of available CCIDs (e.g. {2, 3}) instead of the default value {2}. This means negotiation will not fail if the peer requests to use CCID3 instead of CCID2. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 39131a3c78f8..f0aeb20fa63b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -57,6 +57,10 @@ can be set before calling bind(). DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs +supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). +The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.2.2 From 17c30b40ed79e9f3955e884632c8f01e577b204a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Deprecate Ack Ratio sysctl This patch deprecates the Ack Ratio sysctl, since * Ack Ratio is entirely ignored by CCID-3 and CCID-4, * Ack Ratio currently doesn't work in CCID-2 (i.e. is always set to 1); * even if it would work in CCID-2, there is no point for a user to change it: - Ack Ratio is constrained by cwnd (RFC 4341, 6.1.2), - if Ack Ratio > cwnd, the system resorts to spurious RTO timeouts (since waiting for Acks which will never arrive in this window), - cwnd is not a user-configurable value. The only reasonable place for Ack Ratio is to print it for debugging. It is planned to do this later on, as part of e.g. dccp_probe. With this patch Ack Ratio is now under full control of feature negotiation: * Ack Ratio is resolved as a dependency of the selected CCID; * if the chosen CCID supports it (i.e. CCID == CCID-2), Ack Ratio is set to the default of 2, following RFC 4340, 11.3 - "New connections start with Ack Ratio 2 for both endpoints"; * what happens then is part of another patch set, since it concerns the dynamic update of Ack Ratio while the connection is in full flight. Thanks to Tomasz Grobelny for discussion leading up to this patch. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index f0aeb20fa63b..43df4487379b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -125,9 +125,6 @@ send_ndp = 1 send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -ack_ratio = 2 - The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use. - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. -- cgit v1.2.2 From fade756f18d42694e3acb00e3471ab43002cba16 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Set per-connection CCIDs via socket options With this patch, TX/RX CCIDs can now be changed on a per-connection basis, which overrides the defaults set by the global sysctl variables for TX/RX CCIDs. To make full use of this facility, the remaining patches of this patch set are needed, which track dependencies and activate negotiated feature values. Note on the maximum number of CCIDs that can be registered: ----------------------------------------------------------- The maximum number of CCIDs that can be registered on the socket is constrained by the space in a Confirm/Change feature negotiation option. The space in these in turn depends on the size of header options as defined in RFC 4340, 5.8. Since this is a recurring constant, it has been moved from ackvec.h into linux/dccp.h, clarifying its purpose. Relative to this size, the maximum number of CCID identifiers that can be present in a Confirm option (which always consumes 1 byte more than a Change option, cf. 6.1) is 2 bytes less than the maximum TLV size: one for the CCID-feature-type and one for the selected value. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 43df4487379b..610083ff73f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -61,6 +61,20 @@ DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same +time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is +preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same +type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well +understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or +an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs +must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen(). + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets +the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID. +Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t. + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.2.2 From 78673e24df27c76ec75565f4024d45c2c74ef148 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Remove obsolete parts of the old CCID interface The TX/RX CCIDs of the minisock are now redundant: similar to the Ack Vector case, their value equals initially that of the sysctl, but at the end of feature negotiation may be something different. The old interface removed by this patch thus has been replaced by the newer interface to dynamically query the currently loaded CCIDs earlier in this patch set. Also removed the constructors for the TX CCID and the RX CCID, since the switch rx/non-rx is done by the handler in minisocks.c (and the handler is the only place in the code where CCIDs are loaded). Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 610083ff73f6..a203d132dbef 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -140,10 +140,11 @@ send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). tx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. + Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the + choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. rx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection. + Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. seq_window = 100 The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). -- cgit v1.2.2 From 68e074bfcef269bc61006c2740d7f89ccbbd93d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Remove manual influence on NDP Count feature Updating the NDP count feature is handled automatically now: * for CCID-2 it is disabled, since the code does not use NDP counts; * for CCID-3 it is enabled, as NDP counts are used to determine loss lengths. Allowing the user to change NDP values leads to unpredictable and failing behaviour, since it is then possible to disable NDP counts even when they are needed (e.g. in CCID-3). This means that only those user settings are sensible that agree with the values for Send NDP Count implied by the choice of CCID. But those settings are already activated by the feature negotiation (CCID dependency tracking), hence this form of support is redundant. At startup the initialisation of the NDP count feature is with the default value of 0, which is done implicitly by the zeroing-out of the socket when it is allocated. If the choice of CCID or feature negotiation enables NDP count, this will then be updated via the NDP activation handler. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index a203d132dbef..1403745ab406 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ndp = 1 - Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2). - send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -- cgit v1.2.2 From b235dc4abbc1356284bd0dc730efa711f394e0e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp ccid-2: Phase out the use of boolean Ack Vector sysctl This removes the use of the sysctl and the minisock variable for the Send Ack Vector feature, which is now handled fully dynamically via feature negotiation; i.e. when CCID2 is enabled, Ack Vectors are automatically enabled (as per RFC 4341, 4.). Using a sysctl in parallel to this implementation would open the door to crashes, since much of the code relies on tests of the boolean minisock / sysctl variable. Thus, this patch replaces all tests of type if (dccp_msk(sk)->dccpms_send_ack_vector) /* ... */ with if (dp->dccps_hc_rx_ackvec != NULL) /* ... */ The dccps_hc_rx_ackvec is allocated by the dccp_hdlr_ackvec() when feature negotiation concluded that Ack Vectors are to be used on the half-connection. Otherwise, it is NULL (due to dccp_init_sock/dccp_create_openreq_child), so that the test is a valid one. The activation handler for Ack Vectors is called as soon as the feature negotiation has concluded at the * server when the Ack marking the transition RESPOND => OPEN arrives; * client after it has sent its ACK, marking the transition REQUEST => PARTOPEN. Adding the sequence number of the Response packet to the Ack Vector has been removed, since (a) connection establishment implies that the Response has been received; (b) the CCIDs only look at packets received in the (PART)OPEN state, i.e. this entry will always be ignored; (c) it can not be used for anything useful - to detect loss for instance, only packets received after the loss can serve as pseudo-dupacks. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 1403745ab406..7a3bb1abb830 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ackvec = 1 - Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 51c7d4fa2675c106a980ddcdbe308b54b5151945 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Implement both feature-local and feature-remote Sequence Window feature This adds full support for local/remote Sequence Window feature, from which the * sequence-number-validity (W) and * acknowledgment-number-validity (W') windows derive as specified in RFC 4340, 7.5.3. Specifically, the following changes are introduced: * integrated new socket fields into dccp_sk; * updated the update_gsr/gss routines with regard to these fields; * updated handler code: the Sequence Window feature is located at the TX side, so the local feature is meant if the handler-rx flag is false; * the initialisation of `rcv_wnd' in reqsk is removed, since - rcv_wnd is not used by the code anywhere; - sequence number checks are not done in the LISTEN state (cf. 7.5.3); - dccp_check_req checks the Ack number validity more rigorously; * the `struct dccp_minisock' became empty and is now removed. Until the handshake completes with activating negotiated values, the local/remote Sequence-Window values are undefined and thus can not reliably be estimated. This issue is addressed in a separate patch. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 7a3bb1abb830..b132e4a3cf0f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -141,7 +141,8 @@ rx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. seq_window = 100 - The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). + The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences + the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds -- cgit v1.2.2 From d6da3511d6b558d0b017777b61dc08b8fbc06ea4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tomasz Grobelny Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Policy-based packet dequeueing infrastructure This patch adds a generic infrastructure for policy-based dequeueing of TX packets and provides two policies: * a simple FIFO policy (which is the default) and * a priority based policy (set via socket options). Both policies honour the tx_qlen sysctl for the maximum size of the write queue (can be overridden via socket options). The priority policy uses skb->priority internally to assign an u32 priority identifier, using the same ranking as SO_PRIORITY. The skb->priority field is set to 0 when the packet leaves DCCP. The priority is supplied as ancillary data using cmsg(3), the patch also provides the requisite parsing routines. Signed-off-by: Tomasz Grobelny Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 19 +++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index b132e4a3cf0f..fcfc12534428 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -45,6 +45,25 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes +a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes +during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are +defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, +and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an +u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate +a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to +be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: + cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; + cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; + cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero +value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, +the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy +(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning +EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the +lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is +initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, -- cgit v1.2.2 From 90f31e382b9bb4313327ab504874385654b501fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Kerrisk Date: Mon, 1 Sep 2008 14:03:50 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt: fix typo As noted by Gu Rui in http://bugzilla.kernel.org/show_bug.cgi?id=11444, there is a typo in Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt. After checking the source (sound/pci/hda/hda_intel.c), the report looks correct to me. Signed-off-by: Michael Kerrisk Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index fd3de679386f..30499cf77d56 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. register value without FIFO size correction as the current DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register. - (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the + (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the position buffer.) NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5394f80f92642c61fc2a95385be85f2fdcfb5adb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 01:51:32 -0700 Subject: x86: check for and defend against BIOS memory corruption Some BIOSes have been observed to corrupt memory in the low 64k. This change: - Reserves all memory which does not have to be in that area, to prevent it from being used as general memory by the kernel. Things like the SMP trampoline are still in the memory, however. - Clears the reserved memory so we can observe changes to it. - Adds a function check_for_bios_corruption() which checks and reports on memory becoming unexpectedly non-zero. Currently it's called in the x86 fault handler, and the powermanagement debug output. Signed-off-by: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1150444a21ab..df48af505d15 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -360,6 +360,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,, See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c. + bios_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] + Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of memory + when doing things like suspend/resume. Setting this + option will scan the memory looking for corruption. + boot_delay= Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot. Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to no delay (0). -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9f077871ce7237e2387fc76542b3b4033cb05e49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 01:51:34 -0700 Subject: x86: clean up memory corruption check and add more kernel parameters The corruption check is enabled in Kconfig by default, but disabled at runtime. This patch adds several kernel parameters to control the corruption check's behaviour; these are documented in kernel-parameters.txt. Signed-off-by: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 28 +++++++++++++++++++++++----- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index df48af505d15..6a2629d00598 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -360,11 +360,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,, See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c. - bios_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] - Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of memory - when doing things like suspend/resume. Setting this - option will scan the memory looking for corruption. - boot_delay= Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot. Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to no delay (0). @@ -1233,6 +1228,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file or memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 + memory_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] + Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of + memory when doing things like suspend/resume. + Setting this option will scan the memory + looking for corruption. Enabling this will + both detect corruption and prevent the kernel + from using the memory being corrupted. + However, its intended as a diagnostic tool; if + repeatable BIOS-originated corruption always + affects the same memory, you can use memmap= + to prevent the kernel from using that memory. + + memory_corruption_check_size=size [X86] + By default it checks for corruption in the low + 64k, making this memory unavailable for normal + use. Use this parameter to scan for + corruption in more or less memory. + + memory_corruption_check_period=seconds [X86] + By default it checks for corruption every 60 + seconds. Use this parameter to check at some + other rate. 0 disables periodic checking. + memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest Format: range: 0,4 : pattern number -- cgit v1.2.2 From 410e27a49bb98bc7fa3ff5fc05cc313817b9f253 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Tue, 9 Sep 2008 13:27:22 +0200 Subject: This reverts "Merge branch 'dccp' of git://eden-feed.erg.abdn.ac.uk/dccp_exp" as it accentally contained the wrong set of patches. These will be submitted separately. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 54 +++++++++------------------------------ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 42 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index fcfc12534428..39131a3c78f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -45,25 +45,6 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== -DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes -a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes -during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are -defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, -and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an -u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate -a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to -be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: - cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; - cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; - cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero -value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, -the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy -(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning -EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the -lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is -initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, @@ -76,24 +57,6 @@ can be set before calling bind(). DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14. -DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs -supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). -The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same -time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is -preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same -type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well -understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or -an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs -must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen(). - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets -the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID. -Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t. - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID. - DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait @@ -152,16 +115,23 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. +send_ndp = 1 + Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2). + +send_ackvec = 1 + Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). + +ack_ratio = 2 + The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use. + tx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the - choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. + Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. rx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. + Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection. seq_window = 100 - The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences - the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). + The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds -- cgit v1.2.2 From e8aed68614c81f24d8c4cbcb4923f848ece846e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Lai Jiangshan Date: Wed, 10 Sep 2008 11:01:07 +0800 Subject: doc/RCU: fix pseudocode in rcuref.txt atomic_inc_not_zero(v) return 0 if *v = 0. use spin_lock instead of write_lock for update lock. Signed-off-by: Lai Jiangshan Cc: "Paul E. McKenney" Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt index 451de2ad8329..4202ad093130 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ release_referenced() delete() } If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the -write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock -in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in -search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which +write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock() and changing read_lock() +in search_and_reference() to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_inc() in +search_and_reference() could potentially hold reference to an element which has already been deleted from the list/array. Use atomic_inc_not_zero() in this scenario as follows: @@ -40,20 +40,20 @@ add() search_and_reference() { { alloc_object rcu_read_lock(); ... search_for_element - atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { - write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { + spin_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); return FAIL; add_element } ... ... - write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + spin_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); } } 3. 4. release_referenced() delete() { { - ... write_lock(&list_lock); + ... spin_lock(&list_lock); if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) ... call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); delete_element - ... write_unlock(&list_lock); + ... spin_unlock(&list_lock); } ... if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); -- cgit v1.2.2 From 46dfa040f6c26f416a0979a7cd5a2d81f08121d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Wed, 10 Sep 2008 22:22:34 +0200 Subject: add deprecated ide-scsi to feature-removal-schedule.txt Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index eb1a47b97427..83c88cae1eda 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -322,3 +322,11 @@ Why: Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation. controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter. Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki +--------------------------- + +What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI) +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which + eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more + efficient in every way. +Who: FUJITA Tomonori -- cgit v1.2.2 From 92651940ab00dbe64722e908f70d816713d677b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 16:29:34 -0700 Subject: pkt_sched: Add multiqueue scheduler support This patch is intended to add a qdisc to support the new tx multiqueue architecture by providing a band for each hardware queue. By doing this it is possible to support a different qdisc per physical hardware queue. This qdisc uses the skb->queue_mapping to select which band to place the traffic onto. It then uses a round robin w/ a check to see if the subqueue is stopped to determine which band to dequeue the packet from. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 47 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index d391ea631141..5787ee6eca4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -24,4 +24,49 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.). -Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. + +Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices + +----------------------------------------------- + +Currently two qdiscs support multiqueue devices. The first is the default +pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. A new +round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The +qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to +bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in +the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to. + +sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid unnecessary +requeuing. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue +associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet. + +On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the +hardware. Once the association is made, any skb with skb->queue_mapping set, +will be queued to the band associated with the hardware queue. + + +Section 3: Brief howto using MULTIQ for multiqueue devices +--------------------------------------------------------------- + +The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure +qdiscs. To add the MULTIQ qdisc to your network device, assuming the device +is called eth0, run the following command: + +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: multiq + +The qdisc will allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that +the device reports, and bring the qdisc online. Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx +queues, the band mapping would look like: + +band 0 => queue 0 +band 1 => queue 1 +band 2 => queue 2 +band 3 => queue 3 + +Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either +the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. + +The behavior of tc filters remains the same. + +Author: Alexander Duyck +Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. -- cgit v1.2.2 From ca9b0e27e072be4cef2f5f0cbc0b0fd94eae3520 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 16:30:20 -0700 Subject: pkt_action: add new action skbedit This new action will have the ability to change the priority and/or queue_mapping fields on an sk_buff. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 9 ++++++++- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 5787ee6eca4f..10113ffa8072 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -66,7 +66,14 @@ band 3 => queue 3 Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. -The behavior of tc filters remains the same. +The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, +skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a +specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, though a specific queue you could use +this action and establish a filter such as: + +tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \ + match ip dst 192.168.0.3 \ + action skbedit queue_mapping 3 Author: Alexander Duyck Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 67333bb5679325db310bb612c1de3e6e47bb0043 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 17:56:50 -0700 Subject: skbedit: Fix a typo in the documentation Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 10113ffa8072..8c2b06b77f61 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a -specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, though a specific queue you could use +specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, through a specific queue you could use this action and establish a filter such as: tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \ -- cgit v1.2.2 From f07d1501292b3b0d3276ee0e537005526a45e242 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 17:57:23 -0700 Subject: multiq: Further multiqueue cleanup This patch resolves a few issues found with multiq including wording suggestions and a problem seen in the allocation of queues. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 8c2b06b77f61..4caa0e314cc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -29,15 +29,15 @@ Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices ----------------------------------------------- -Currently two qdiscs support multiqueue devices. The first is the default -pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. A new -round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The +Currently two qdiscs are optimized for multiqueue devices. The first is the +default pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. +A new round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to. -sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid unnecessary -requeuing. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue +sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid head-of-line +blocking. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet. On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ band 1 => queue 1 band 2 => queue 2 band 3 => queue 3 -Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either -the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. +Traffic will begin flowing through each queue based on either the simple_tx_hash +function or based on netdev->select_queue() if you have it defined. The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a -- cgit v1.2.2 From 024994310e10cd7632f43b6873558820308c1af1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Li Zefan Date: Sat, 13 Sep 2008 02:33:09 -0700 Subject: cpuset: hotplug documentation fix If all the cpus in a cpuset are offlined, the tasks in it will be moved to the nearest ancestor with non-empty cpus. Signed-off-by: Li Zefan Acked-by: Paul Jackson Cc: Paul Menage Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cpusets.txt | 18 ++++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt index 1f5a924d1e56..47e568a9370a 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt @@ -635,14 +635,16 @@ prior 'mems' setting, will not be moved. There is an exception to the above. If hotplug functionality is used to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset, -then the kernel will automatically update the cpus_allowed of all -tasks attached to CPUs in that cpuset to allow all CPUs. When memory -hotplug functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a -similar exception is expected to apply there as well. In general, -the kernel prefers to violate cpuset placement, over starving a task -that has had all its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. User -code should reconfigure cpusets to only refer to online CPUs and Memory -Nodes when using hotplug to add or remove such resources. +then all the tasks in that cpuset will be moved to the nearest ancestor +with non-empty cpus. But the moving of some (or all) tasks might fail if +cpuset is bound with another cgroup subsystem which has some restrictions +on task attaching. In this failing case, those tasks will stay +in the original cpuset, and the kernel will automatically update +their cpus_allowed to allow all online CPUs. When memory hotplug +functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a similar exception +is expected to apply there as well. In general, the kernel prefers to +violate cpuset placement, over starving a task that has had all +its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. There is a second exception to the above. GFP_ATOMIC requests are kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately. -- cgit v1.2.2 From b261dfea48e81636516f4fa653667097638a8a62 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hidehiro Kawai Date: Sat, 13 Sep 2008 02:33:10 -0700 Subject: coredump_filter: add description of bit 4 There is no description of bit 4 of coredump_filter in the documentation. This patch adds it. Signed-off-by: Hidehiro Kawai Cc: Roland McGrath Cc: Mel Gorman Acked-by: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 394eb2cc1c39..f566ad9bcb7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -2413,6 +2413,8 @@ The following 4 memory types are supported: - (bit 1) anonymous shared memory - (bit 2) file-backed private memory - (bit 3) file-backed shared memory + - (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is + effective only if the bit 2 is cleared) Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9f986a8cdf94a5855201cf67db6ffdf926bc4cd9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Sat, 13 Sep 2008 02:33:20 -0700 Subject: Documentation/ABI: /sys/class/gpio Provide summary ABI docs about the /sys/class/gpio files. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio | 26 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 26 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8aab8092ad35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +What: /sys/class/gpio/ +Date: July 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.27 +Contact: David Brownell +Description: + + As a Kconfig option, individual GPIO signals may be accessed from + userspace. GPIOs are only made available to userspace by an explicit + "export" operation. If a given GPIO is not claimed for use by + kernel code, it may be exported by userspace (and unexported later). + Kernel code may export it for complete or partial access. + + GPIOs are identified as they are inside the kernel, using integers in + the range 0..INT_MAX. See Documentation/gpio.txt for more information. + + /sys/class/gpio + /export ... asks the kernel to export a GPIO to userspace + /unexport ... to return a GPIO to the kernel + /gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N + /value ... always readable, writes fail for input GPIOs + /direction ... r/w as: in, out (default low); write: high, low + /gpiochipN ... for each gpiochip; #N is its first GPIO + /base ... (r/o) same as N + /label ... (r/o) descriptive, not necessarily unique + /ngpio ... (r/o) number of GPIOs; numbered N to N + (ngpio - 1) + -- cgit v1.2.2 From b2e1b30290539b344cbaff0d9da38012e03aa347 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Luis R. Rodriguez" Date: Tue, 9 Sep 2008 23:19:48 -0700 Subject: cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 18 +++ Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt | 194 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 212 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index eb1a47b97427..c93fcdec246d 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -6,6 +6,24 @@ be removed from this file. --------------------------- +What: old static regulatory information and ieee80211_regdom module parameter +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The old regulatory infrastructure has been replaced with a new one + which does not require statically defined regulatory domains. We do + not want to keep static regulatory domains in the kernel due to the + the dynamic nature of regulatory law and localization. We kept around + the old static definitions for the regulatory domains of: + * US + * JP + * EU + and used by default the US when CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY was + set. We also kept around the ieee80211_regdom module parameter in case + some applications were relying on it. Changing regulatory domains + can now be done instead by using nl80211, as is done with iw. +Who: Luis R. Rodriguez + +--------------------------- + What: dev->power.power_state When: July 2007 Why: Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a96989a8ff35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +Linux wireless regulatory documentation +--------------------------------------- + +This document gives a brief review over how the Linux wireless +regulatory infrastructure works. + +More up to date information can be obtained at the project's web page: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory + +Keeping regulatory domains in userspace +--------------------------------------- + +Due to the dynamic nature of regulatory domains we keep them +in userspace and provide a framework for userspace to upload +to the kernel one regulatory domain to be used as the central +core regulatory domain all wireless devices should adhere to. + +How to get regulatory domains to the kernel +------------------------------------------- + +Userspace gets a regulatory domain in the kernel by having +a userspace agent build it and send it via nl80211. Only +expected regulatory domains will be respected by the kernel. + +A currently available userspace agent which can accomplish this +is CRDA - central regulatory domain agent. Its documented here: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA + +Essentially the kernel will send a udev event when it knows +it needs a new regulatory domain. A udev rule can be put in place +to trigger crda to send the respective regulatory domain for a +specific ISO/IEC 3166 alpha2. + +Below is an example udev rule which can be used: + +# Example file, should be put in /etc/udev/rules.d/regulatory.rules +KERNEL=="regulatory*", ACTION=="change", SUBSYSTEM=="platform", RUN+="/sbin/crda" + +The alpha2 is passed as an environment variable under the variable COUNTRY. + +Who asks for regulatory domains? +-------------------------------- + +* Users + +Users can use iw: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/iw + +An example: + + # set regulatory domain to "Costa Rica" + iw reg set CR + +This will request the kernel to set the regulatory domain to +the specificied alpha2. The kernel in turn will then ask userspace +to provide a regulatory domain for the alpha2 specified by the user +by sending a uevent. + +* Wireless subsystems for Country Information elements + +The kernel will send a uevent to inform userspace a new +regulatory domain is required. More on this to be added +as its integration is added. + +* Drivers + +If drivers determine they need a specific regulatory domain +set they can inform the wireless core using regulatory_hint(). +They have two options -- they either provide an alpha2 so that +crda can provide back a regulatory domain for that country or +they can build their own regulatory domain based on internal +custom knowledge so the wireless core can respect it. + +*Most* drivers will rely on the first mechanism of providing a +regulatory hint with an alpha2. For these drivers there is an additional +check that can be used to ensure compliance based on custom EEPROM +regulatory data. This additional check can be used by drivers by +registering on its struct wiphy a reg_notifier() callback. This notifier +is called when the core's regulatory domain has been changed. The driver +can use this to review the changes made and also review who made them +(driver, user, country IE) and determine what to allow based on its +internal EEPROM data. Devices drivers wishing to be capable of world +roaming should use this callback. More on world roaming will be +added to this document when its support is enabled. + +Device drivers who provide their own built regulatory domain +do not need a callback as the channels registered by them are +the only ones that will be allowed and therefore *additional* +cannels cannot be enabled. + +Example code - drivers hinting an alpha2: +------------------------------------------ + +This example comes from the zd1211rw device driver. You can start +by having a mapping of your device's EEPROM country/regulatory +domain value to to a specific alpha2 as follows: + +static struct zd_reg_alpha2_map reg_alpha2_map[] = { + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FCC, "US" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_IC, "CA" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_ETSI, "DE" }, /* Generic ETSI, use most restrictive */ + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN_ADD, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_SPAIN, "ES" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FRANCE, "FR" }, + +Then you can define a routine to map your read EEPROM value to an alpha2, +as follows: + +static int zd_reg2alpha2(u8 regdomain, char *alpha2) +{ + unsigned int i; + struct zd_reg_alpha2_map *reg_map; + for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(reg_alpha2_map); i++) { + reg_map = ®_alpha2_map[i]; + if (regdomain == reg_map->reg) { + alpha2[0] = reg_map->alpha2[0]; + alpha2[1] = reg_map->alpha2[1]; + return 0; + } + } + return 1; +} + +Lastly, you can then hint to the core of your discovered alpha2, if a match +was found. You need to do this after you have registered your wiphy. You +are expected to do this during initialization. + + r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2); + if (!r) + regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL); + +Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain: +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your +driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain +structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should +kmalloc() a structure big enough to hold your regulatory domain +structure and you should then fill it with your data. Finally you simply +call regulatory_hint() with the regulatory domain structure in it. + +Bellow is a simple example, with a regulatory domain cached using the stack. +Your implementation may vary (read EEPROM cache instead, for example). + +Example cache of some regulatory domain + +struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = { + .n_reg_rules = 3, + .alpha2 = "JP", + //.alpha2 = "99", /* If I have no alpha2 to map it to */ + .reg_rules = { + /* IEEE 802.11b/g, channels 1..14 */ + REG_RULE(2412-20, 2484+20, 40, 6, 20, 0), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 34..48 */ + REG_RULE(5170-20, 5240+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_PASSIVE_SCAN), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 52..64 */ + REG_RULE(5260-20, 5320+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_NO_IBSS | + NL80211_RRF_DFS), + } +}; + +Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: + + int r; + struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd; + int size_of_regd; + int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules; + unsigned int i; + + size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) + + (num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + + rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL); + if (!rd) + return -ENOMEM; + + memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain)); + + for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) { + memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], + sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + } + r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); + if (r) { + kfree(rd); + return r; + } + -- cgit v1.2.2 From bed7aac9416f50425d2200df32bcc9bf248ff8cb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 11:58:01 -0300 Subject: rfkill: remove transmitter blocking on suspend Currently, rfkill would stand in the way of properly supporting wireless devices that are capable of waking the system up from sleep or hibernation when they receive a special wireless message. It would also get in the way of mesh devices that need to remain operational even during platform suspend. To avoid that, stop trying to block the transmitters on the rfkill class suspend handler. Drivers that need rfkill's older behaviour will have to implement it by themselves in their own suspend handling. Do note that rfkill *will* attempt to restore the transmitter state on resume in any situation. This happens after the driver's resume method is called by the suspend core (class devices resume after the devices they are attached to have been resumed). The following drivers need to check if they need to explicitly block their transmitters in their own suspend handlers (maintainers Cc'd): arch/arm/mach-pxa/tosa-bt.c drivers/net/usb/hso.c drivers/net/wireless/rt2x00/* (USB might need it?) drivers/net/wireless/b43/ (SSB over USB might need it?) drivers/misc/hp-wmi.c eeepc-laptop w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) Compal laptop w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) toshiba-acpi w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) Signed-off-by: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Cc: Ivo van Doorn Cc: Matthew Garrett Cc: Andrew Bird Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman Cc: Cezary Jackiewicz Cc: Philip Langdale Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/rfkill.txt | 32 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 28 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 6fcb3060dec5..b65f0799df48 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -341,6 +341,8 @@ key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific 3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers ------------------------------------------ +(in this text, rfkill->foo means the foo field of struct rfkill). + 1. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it. @@ -363,10 +365,32 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set, when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill line. -5. During suspend, the rfkill class will attempt to soft-block the radio -through a call to rfkill->toggle_radio, and will try to restore its previous -state during resume. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call -rfkill->toggle_radio until it is resumed. +5. The wireless device driver MUST NOT leave the transmitter enabled during +suspend and hibernation unless: + + 5.1. The transmitter has to be enabled for some sort of functionality + like wake-on-wireless-packet or autonomous packed forwarding in a mesh + network, and that functionality is enabled for this suspend/hibernation + cycle. + +AND + + 5.2. The device was not on a user-requested BLOCKED state before + the suspend (i.e. the driver must NOT unblock a device, not even + to support wake-on-wireless-packet or remain in the mesh). + +In other words, there is absolutely no allowed scenario where a driver can +automatically take action to unblock a rfkill controller (obviously, this deals +with scenarios where soft-blocking or both soft and hard blocking is happening. +Scenarios where hardware rfkill lines are the only ones blocking the +transmitter are outside of this rule, since the wireless device driver does not +control its input hardware rfkill lines in the first place). + +6. During resume, rfkill will try to restore its previous state. + +7. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call rfkill->toggle_radio +until it is resumed. + Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem: -------------------------------------------------------------------- -- cgit v1.2.2 From 62c1f95e3993480ae451c322588f7cbf5a58db28 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Berg Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 10:18:44 +0200 Subject: mac80211: clean up kdoc A few errors sneaked in over time, some functions no longer exist, for some alternatives exist. This changes the docbook template to include the right things. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl | 12 ++++-------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl index b651e0a4b1c0..77c3c202991b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl @@ -145,7 +145,6 @@ usage should require reading the full document. this though and the recommendation to allow only a single interface in STA mode at first! -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf @@ -177,8 +176,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. functions/definitions !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status @@ -189,12 +187,11 @@ usage should require reading the full document. !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues @@ -230,8 +227,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. Multiple queues and QoS support TBD !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats -- cgit v1.2.2 From c4e84bde1d595d857d3c74b49b9c45cc770df792 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ron Mercer Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 11:56:28 -0400 Subject: qlge: New Qlogic 10Gb Ethernet Driver. Signed-off-by: Ron Mercer Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge | 46 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..123b6edd7f18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2008 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation (version 2 or a later version). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + -- cgit v1.2.2 From 2842e5bf3115193f05dc9dac20f940e7abf44c1a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joerg Roedel Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 15:23:43 +0200 Subject: x86: move GART TLB flushing options to generic code The GART currently implements the iommu=[no]fullflush command line parameters which influence its IO/TLB flushing strategy. This patch makes these parameters generic so that they can be used by the AMD IOMMU too. Signed-off-by: Joerg Roedel Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 2 -- 2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1150444a21ab..40066ceb48fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -893,6 +893,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nomerge forcesac soft + fullflush + Flush IO/TLB at every deallocation + nofullflush + Flush IO/TLB only when addresses are reused (default) intel_iommu= [DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index b0c7b6c4abda..c83c8e4bc8e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -233,8 +233,6 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU: Set the size of the remapping area in bytes. allowed Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets. - fullflush Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default). - nofullflush Don't use IOMMU fullflush. leak Turn on simple iommu leak tracing (only when CONFIG_IOMMU_LEAK is on). Default number of leak pages is 20. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7407a2e4b9e1fb3528bb355a571ee3eb7e32c386 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Clemens Ladisch Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 09:12:11 +0200 Subject: ALSA: virtuoso: add Xonar HDAV1.3 support Add support for the Asus Xonar HDAV1.3 and the Xonar HDAV1.3 Deluxe. Signed-off-by: Clemens Ladisch --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 30499cf77d56..e0e54a27fc10 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -2120,7 +2120,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ------------------- Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, - i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2 and D2X. + i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X and HDAV1.3 (Deluxe). This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. -- cgit v1.2.2 From afa9fdc2f5f8e4d98f3e77bfa204412cbc181346 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Sat, 20 Sep 2008 01:23:30 +0900 Subject: iommu: remove fullflush and nofullflush in IOMMU generic option This patch against tip/x86/iommu virtually reverts 2842e5bf3115193f05dc9dac20f940e7abf44c1a. But just reverting the commit breaks AMD IOMMU so this patch also includes some fixes. The above commit adds new two options to x86 IOMMU generic kernel boot options, fullflush and nofullflush. But such change that affects all the IOMMUs needs more discussion (all IOMMU parties need the chance to discuss it): http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/9/19/106 Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Acked-by: Joerg Roedel Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 9 +++++---- Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 2 ++ 2 files changed, 7 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 40066ceb48fe..040ce30632b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -284,6 +284,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far as possible, will get its own protection domain) + fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when + they are unmapped. Otherwise they are + flushed before they will be reused, which + is a lot of faster + amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64] Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU driver. Possible values are: @@ -893,10 +898,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nomerge forcesac soft - fullflush - Flush IO/TLB at every deallocation - nofullflush - Flush IO/TLB only when addresses are reused (default) intel_iommu= [DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index c83c8e4bc8e5..b0c7b6c4abda 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -233,6 +233,8 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU: Set the size of the remapping area in bytes. allowed Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets. + fullflush Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default). + nofullflush Don't use IOMMU fullflush. leak Turn on simple iommu leak tracing (only when CONFIG_IOMMU_LEAK is on). Default number of leak pages is 20. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 953f551756a1275d9bfdbb70697323449305161a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Remi Denis-Courmont Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 20:09:46 -0700 Subject: Phonet: kernel documentation MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Rémi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 111 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 111 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/phonet.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f3c72e0ca8d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +Linux Phonet protocol family +============================ + +Introduction +------------ + +Phonet is a packet protocol used by Nokia cellular modems for both IPC +and RPC. With the Linux Phonet socket family, Linux host processes can +receive and send messages from/to the modem, or any other external +device attached to the modem. The modem takes care of routing. + +Phonet packets can be exchanged through various hardware connections +depending on the device, such as: + - USB with the CDC Phonet interface, + - infrared, + - Bluetooth, + - an RS232 serial port (with a dedicated "FBUS" line discipline), + - the SSI bus with some TI OMAP processors. + + +Packets format +-------------- + +Phonet packet have a common header as follow: + + struct phonethdr { + uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */ + uint8_t pn_rdev; /* Receiver device ID */ + uint8_t pn_sdev; /* Sender device ID */ + uint8_t pn_res; /* Resource ID or function */ + uint16_t pn_length; /* Big-endian message byte length (minus 6) */ + uint8_t pn_robj; /* Receiver object ID */ + uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */ + }; + +The device ID is split: the 6 higher order bits consitutes the device +address, while the 2 lower order bits are used for multiplexing, as are +the 8-bits object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a +network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport +protocol (much like port numbers in IP world). + +The modem always has address number zero. Each other device has a its +own 6-bits address. + + +Link layer +---------- + +Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header +consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the +link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's +perspective. + +Linux Phonet network interfaces use a dedicated link layer type +(ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can only +send and receive Phonet packets. + +Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so +only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them. + + +Network layer +------------- + +The Phonet socket address family maps the Phonet packet header: + + struct sockaddr_pn { + sa_family_t spn_family; /* AF_PHONET */ + uint8_t spn_obj; /* Object ID */ + uint8_t spn_dev; /* Device ID */ + uint8_t spn_resource; /* Resource or function */ + uint8_t spn_zero[...]; /* Padding */ + }; + +The resource field is only used when sending and receiving; +It is ignored by bind() and getsockname(). + + +Low-level datagram protocol +--------------------------- + +Applications can send Phonet messages using the Phonet datagram socket +protocol from the PF_PHONET family. Each socket is bound to one of the +2^10 object IDs available, and can send and receive packets with any +other peer. + + struct sockaddr_pn addr = { .spn_family = AF_PHONET, }; + ssize_t len; + socklen_t addrlen = sizeof(addr); + int fd; + + fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); + bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + /* ... */ + + sendto(fd, msg, msglen, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + len = recvfrom(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), 0, + (struct sockaddr *)&addr, &addrlen); + +This protocol follows the SOCK_DGRAM connection-less semantics. +However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did +not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). + + +Authors +------- + +Linux Phonet was initially written by Sakari Ailus. +Other contributors include Mikä Liljeberg, Andras Domokos, +Carlos Chinea and Rémi Denis-Courmont. +Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 1a73ef6ac3f4b44abc9d1875eb9240d7524a7cf7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Martin Steigerwald Date: Tue, 23 Sep 2008 13:48:44 +0200 Subject: CFS scheduler: documentation about scheduling policies The documentation about the CFS scheduler is scarse when it comes to scheduling policies. This patch adds a chapter about the scheduling policies it supports. Peter Zijlstra provided most of the information for it in http://marc.info/?l=linux-kernel&m=122210038326356&w=2 Signed-off-by: Martin Steigerwald Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 28 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 26 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index b2aa856339a7..9d8eb553884c 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -114,7 +114,31 @@ result. -5. SCHEDULING CLASSES +5. Scheduling policies + +CFS implements three scheduling policies: + + - SCHED_NORMAL (traditionally called SCHED_OTHER): The scheduling + policy that is used for regular tasks. + + - SCHED_BATCH: Does not preempt nearly as often as regular tasks + would, thereby allowing tasks to run longer and make better use of + caches but at the cost of interactivity. This is well suited for + batch jobs. + + - SCHED_IDLE: This is even weaker than nice 19, but its not a true + idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority + inversion problems which would deadlock the machine. + +SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by +POSIX. + +The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except +SCHED_IDLE. + + + +6. SCHEDULING CLASSES The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules @@ -179,7 +203,7 @@ This is the (partial) list of the hooks: -6. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS +7. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and -- cgit v1.2.2 From 6675ce13ed783f88ea5d82f0d855462b76ff0dad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marin Mitov Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 13:57:46 -0700 Subject: Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt: update for pci_dma_mapping_error() changes Make the example code consistent with changed API. Signed-off-by: Marin Mitov Acked-by: FUJITA Tomonori Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt index b463ecd0c7ce..c74fec8c2351 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ failure can be determined by: dma_addr_t dma_handle; dma_handle = pci_map_single(pdev, addr, size, direction); - if (pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) { + if (pci_dma_mapping_error(pdev, dma_handle)) { /* * reduce current DMA mapping usage, * delay and try again later or -- cgit v1.2.2 From b4d19cc84e8e6838f4aa0b26b3afcdc8c7f71505 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andrew Morton Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 13:57:51 -0700 Subject: Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt: fix softlockup_thresh description - s/s/seconds/ - s/10 seconds/60 seconds/ - Mention the zero-disables-it feature. Cc: Ingo Molnar Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 276a7e637822..e1ff0d920a5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -351,9 +351,10 @@ kernel. This value defaults to SHMMAX. softlockup_thresh: -This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance -threshold. The default threshold is 10s. If a cpu is locked up -for 10s, the kernel complains. Valid values are 1-60s. +This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance threshold. The +default threshold is 60 seconds. If a cpu is locked up for 60 seconds, +the kernel complains. Valid values are 1-60 seconds. Setting this +tunable to zero will disable the softlockup detection altogether. ============================================================== -- cgit v1.2.2 From 697e04db5678fadf96d437806b676403ebee806d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oliver Neukum Date: Tue, 2 Sep 2008 10:52:08 +0200 Subject: USB: update of Documentation/usb/anchors.txt The extended anchor API is documented Signed-off-by: Oliver Neukum Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/anchors.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt index 7304bcf5a306..5e6b64c20d25 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt @@ -42,9 +42,21 @@ This function kills all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs are called in the reverse temporal order they were submitted. This way no data can be reordered. +usb_unlink_anchored_urbs() +-------------------------- + +This function unlinks all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs +are processed in the reverse temporal order they were submitted. +This is similar to usb_kill_anchored_urbs(), but it will not sleep. +Therefore no guarantee is made that the URBs have been unlinked when +the call returns. They may be unlinked later but will be unlinked in +finite time. + usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout() ------------------------------- This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you whether the timeout was reached. + + -- cgit v1.2.2 From e5d2304802a63304a54cff010209c4a717a2509f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oliver Hartkopp Date: Tue, 23 Sep 2008 14:53:14 -0700 Subject: can: Add documentation for virtual CAN driver usage This patch adds a usage documentation for the virtual CAN driver (vcan). Signed-off-by: Oliver Hartkopp Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/can.txt | 44 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 40 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 297ba7b1ccaf..2035bc4932f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -35,8 +35,9 @@ This file contains 6.1 general settings 6.2 local loopback of sent frames 6.3 CAN controller hardware filters - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware - 6.5 todo + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware + 6.6 todo 7 Credits @@ -584,7 +585,42 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus load without any problems ... - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware (September 2007) + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + + Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local + CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of + + - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID) + - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0) + + so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed. + + The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN + frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network + devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ... + When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko + + Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel + netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and + removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool: + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface: + ip link add type vcan + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42': + ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan + + - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42': + ip link del vcan42 + + The tool 'vcan' from the SocketCAN SVN repository on BerliOS is obsolete. + + Virtual CAN network device creation in older Kernels: + In Linux Kernel versions < 2.6.24 the vcan driver creates 4 vcan + netdevices at module load time by default. This value can be changed + with the module parameter 'numdev'. E.g. 'modprobe vcan numdev=8' + + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan there are different drivers available: @@ -603,7 +639,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website. - 6.5 todo (September 2007) + 6.6 todo The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the -- cgit v1.2.2 From fec12a62d74dc93a36c9ce1c3bce9ba045e44846 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Miao Date: Fri, 19 Sep 2008 02:15:08 +0800 Subject: Documentation: fix the now deprecated reference to {set,reset}_scoop_gpio Due to recent patches removing the now deprecated references to {set,reset}_scoop_gpio() and converting them to the generic GPIO API, the references in the documentation also need to be fixed. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Cc: Liam Girdwood Signed-off-by: Russell King --- Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt | 12 ++---------- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt index b2ed6983f40d..46f9684d0b29 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt @@ -135,11 +135,7 @@ when the Mic is inserted:- static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event) { - if(SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - + gpio_set_value(SPITZ_GPIO_MIC_BIAS, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } @@ -269,11 +265,7 @@ powered only when the spk is in use. /* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */ static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event) { - if (SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - + gpio_set_value(CORGI_GPIO_APM_ON, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } -- cgit v1.2.2 From d0eb40628e29c2bb3b5f8242b1d2f50b1a88d9da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?M=C3=A1rton=20N=C3=A9meth?= Date: Sat, 27 Sep 2008 19:32:17 +0200 Subject: cdrom: update ioctl documentation MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Correct copy-paste problem: CDROMCLOSETRAY is about closing the tray, not opening it. Signed-off-by: Márton Németh Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Cc: Jens Axboe Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt index 62d4af44ec4a..59df81c8da2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt @@ -271,14 +271,14 @@ CDROMCLOSETRAY pendant of CDROMEJECT usage: - ioctl(fd, CDROMEJECT, 0); + ioctl(fd, CDROMCLOSETRAY, 0); inputs: none outputs: none error returns: - ENOSYS cd drive not capable of ejecting + ENOSYS cd drive not capable of closing the tray EBUSY other processes are accessing drive, or door is locked notes: -- cgit v1.2.2 From 40f17a7981f1d8baf0ad13233e5e7632754d931a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans de Goede Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 03:57:01 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8909): gspca: PAC 7302 webcam 093a:262a added. Signed-off-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 0f03900c48fb..9a3e4d797fa8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -190,6 +190,7 @@ pac7311 093a:260f SnakeCam pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 +pac7311 093a:262a Webcam 300k zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 -- cgit v1.2.2 From ac2dc8ca14fb9028b160d89fdef04ecc66add3a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?R=C3=A9mi=20Denis-Courmont?= Date: Tue, 30 Sep 2008 02:52:01 -0700 Subject: Phonet: improve documentation Fix grammar errors spotted by Randy Dunlap, and adds some more details. Signed-off-by: Remi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 32 +++++++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index f3c72e0ca8d7..57d3e59edb13 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ depending on the device, such as: Packets format -------------- -Phonet packet have a common header as follow: +Phonet packets have a common header as follows: struct phonethdr { uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */ @@ -33,14 +33,17 @@ Phonet packet have a common header as follow: uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */ }; -The device ID is split: the 6 higher order bits consitutes the device -address, while the 2 lower order bits are used for multiplexing, as are -the 8-bits object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a +On Linux, the link-layer header includes the pn_media byte (see below). +The next 7 bytes are part of the network-layer header. + +The device ID is split: the 6 higher-order bits consitute the device +address, while the 2 lower-order bits are used for multiplexing, as are +the 8-bit object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport protocol (much like port numbers in IP world). -The modem always has address number zero. Each other device has a its -own 6-bits address. +The modem always has address number zero. All other device have a their +own 6-bit address. Link layer @@ -49,11 +52,18 @@ Link layer Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's -perspective. - -Linux Phonet network interfaces use a dedicated link layer type -(ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can only -send and receive Phonet packets. +perspective. Each Phonet network device shall prepend and set the media +type byte as appropriate. For convenience, a common phonet_header_ops +link-layer header operations structure is provided. It sets the +media type according to the network device hardware address. + +Linux Phonet network interfaces support a dedicated link layer packets +type (ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can +only send and receive Phonet packets. + +The virtual TUN tunnel device driver can also be used for Phonet. This +requires IFF_TUN mode, _without_ the IFF_NO_PI flag. In this case, +there is no link-layer header, so there is no Phonet media type byte. Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them. -- cgit v1.2.2 From a30c3f69e6336cb9b09a989595e417367e4e9b1b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andrew Vasquez Date: Fri, 18 Jul 2008 08:32:52 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] fc_transport: Add an API to allow an LLD to create vports There's already a fc_vport_termintate() call exported by the transport. This patch adds a symmetric call to the API to allow an NPIV-capable LLD to instantiate vports sans user intervention. Additional comments/updates: Re: scsi_fc_transport.txt Add a function prototype for fc_vport_terminate similar to what's done for fc_vport_create Re: fc_vport_create I recommend we pass the channel number in fc_vport_create rather than fixing it at zero. Also, ids->vport_type should be set to FC_PORTTYPE_NPIV prior to calling fc_vport_create. The comment is also meaningless. Added-by and Signed-off-by: James Smart Signed-off-by: Andrew Vasquez Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt | 36 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 36 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index 75143f0c23b6..38d324d62b25 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -436,6 +436,42 @@ Other: was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well. +Transport supplied functions +---------------------------- + +The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs. + + fc_vport_create - create a vport + fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport + +Details: + +/** + * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport + * @shost: scsi host the virtual port is connected to. + * @ids: The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for + * the virtual port. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +struct fc_vport * +fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids) + +/** + * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport + * @vport: fc_vport to be terminated + * + * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes + * the vport from the shost and object tree. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +int +fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport) + + Credits ======= The following people have contributed to this document: -- cgit v1.2.2 From 37515facd001942221d68171c81c1f46d54ffdd0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 23:21:54 -0400 Subject: ext4: Improve the documentation for ext4's /proc tunables Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" Cc: Alex Tomas Cc: Andreas Dilger --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 70 ++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 33 insertions(+), 37 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index f566ad9bcb7b..d9ac9706735b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -923,45 +923,41 @@ CPUs. The "procs_blocked" line gives the number of processes currently blocked, waiting for I/O to complete. + 1.9 Ext4 file system parameters ------------------------------ -Ext4 file system have one directory per partition under /proc/fs/ext4/ -# ls /proc/fs/ext4/hdc/ -group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req -stats stream_req - -mb_groups: -This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks - -mb_history: -Multiblock allocation history. - -stats: -This file indicate whether the multiblock allocator should start collecting -statistics. The statistics are shown during unmount - -group_prealloc: -The multiblock allocator normalize the block allocation request to -group_prealloc filesystem blocks if we don't have strip value set. -The stripe value can be specified at mount time or during mke2fs. - -max_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator can look for a best extent (in found extents) - -min_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator must look for a best extent - -order2_req: -Multiblock allocator use 2^N search using buddies only for requests greater -than or equal to order2_req. The request size is specfied in file system -blocks. A value of 2 indicate only if the requests are greater than or equal -to 4 blocks. - -stream_req: -Files smaller than stream_req are served by the stream allocator, whose -purpose is to pack requests as close each to other as possible to -produce smooth I/O traffic. Avalue of 16 indicate that file smaller than 16 -filesystem block size will use group based preallocation. + +Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in +/proc/fs/ext4. Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in +/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or +/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0). The files in each per-device directory are shown +in Table 1-10, below. + +Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/ +.............................................................................. + File Content + mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks + mb_history multiblock allocation history + stats controls whether the multiblock allocator should start + collecting statistics, which are shown during the unmount + group_prealloc the multiblock allocator will round up allocation + requests to a multiple of this tuning parameter if the + stripe size is not set in the ext4 superblock + max_to_scan The maximum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + min_to_scan The minimum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + order2_req Tuning parameter which controls the minimum size for + requests (as a power of 2) where the buddy cache is + used + stream_req Files which have fewer blocks than this tunable + parameter will have their blocks allocated out of a + block group specific preallocation pool, so that small + files are packed closely together. Each large file + will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique + preallocation pool. +.............................................................................. + ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary -- cgit v1.2.2 From 240799cdf22bd789ea6852653c3b879d35ad0a6c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 23:53:47 -0400 Subject: ext4: Use readahead when reading an inode from the inode table With modern hard drives, reading 64k takes roughly the same time as reading a 4k block. So request readahead for adjacent inode table blocks to reduce the time it takes when iterating over directories (especially when doing this in htree sort order) in a cold cache case. With this patch, the time it takes to run "git status" on a kernel tree after flushing the caches via "echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches" is reduced by 21%. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 6 ++++++ Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 3 +++ 2 files changed, 9 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 0d5394920a31..289057958f90 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -177,6 +177,11 @@ barrier=<0|1(*)> This enables/disables the use of write barriers in your disks are battery-backed in one way or another, disabling barriers may safely improve performance. +inode_readahead=n This tuning parameter controls the maximum + number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode + table readahead algorithm will pre-read into + the buffer cache. The default value is 32 blocks. + orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is enabled by default. @@ -252,6 +257,7 @@ stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time. nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation when data is copied from user to page cache. + Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index d9ac9706735b..d831d24d2a6c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -956,6 +956,9 @@ Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/ files are packed closely together. Each large file will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique preallocation pool. +inode_readahead Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of + inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead + algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache .............................................................................. -- cgit v1.2.2 From c4b929b85bdb64afacbbf6453b1f2bf7e14c9e89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Fasheh Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 19:44:18 -0400 Subject: vfs: vfs-level fiemap interface Basic vfs-level fiemap infrastructure, which sets up a new ->fiemap inode operation. Userspace can get extent information on a file via fiemap ioctl. As input, the fiemap ioctl takes a struct fiemap which includes an array of struct fiemap_extent (fm_extents). Size of the extent array is passed as fm_extent_count and number of extents returned will be written into fm_mapped_extents. Offset and length fields on the fiemap structure (fm_start, fm_length) describe a logical range which will be searched for extents. All extents returned will at least partially contain this range. The actual extent offsets and ranges returned will be unmodified from their offset and range on-disk. The fiemap ioctl returns '0' on success. On error, -1 is returned and errno is set. If errno is equal to EBADR, then fm_flags will contain those flags which were passed in which the kernel did not understand. On all other errors, the contents of fm_extents is undefined. As fiemap evolved, there have been many authors of the vfs patch. As far as I can tell, the list includes: Kalpak Shah Andreas Dilger Eric Sandeen Mark Fasheh Signed-off-by: Mark Fasheh Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" Cc: Michael Kerrisk Cc: linux-api@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-fsdevel@vger.kernel.org --- Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt | 228 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 228 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e3defcfe50b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +============ +Fiemap Ioctl +============ + +The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file +extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap +returns a list of extents. + + +Request Basics +-------------- + +A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap: + +struct fiemap { + __u64 fm_start; /* logical offset (inclusive) at + * which to start mapping (in) */ + __u64 fm_length; /* logical length of mapping which + * userspace cares about (in) */ + __u32 fm_flags; /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */ + __u32 fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were + * mapped (out) */ + __u32 fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */ + __u32 fm_reserved; + struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */ +}; + + +fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file +which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror +those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent +may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned +extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes. + +Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be +set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular +flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain +the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible +with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified. +It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular +flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the +fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing +compatibility with old software. + +fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array +that can be used to return extents. If fm_extent_count is zero, then the +fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the +fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in +fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping. Note that there is +nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP. + +The following flags can be set in fm_flags: + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC +If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents. + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR +If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes +extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree. + + +Extent Mapping +-------------- + +Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array +which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The +number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via +fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be +returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents +allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range, +the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[] +array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to +fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not +complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +flag set (see the next section on extent flags). + +Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as +returned in fm_extents. + +struct fiemap_extent { + __u64 fe_logical; /* logical offset in bytes for the start of + * the extent */ + __u64 fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start + * of the extent */ + __u64 fe_length; /* length in bytes for the extent */ + __u64 fe_reserved64[2]; + __u32 fe_flags; /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */ + __u32 fe_reserved[3]; +}; + +All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk. It is valid +for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical +length to extend past the request. Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is +returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the +block size of the file system. With the exception of extents flagged as +FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged. + +The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned. +A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in +the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no +more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again. + +Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the +presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for +a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags +which imply that property. + +For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL +are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking +for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software +which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents +however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to +worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned +data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for +FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +This is the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past this +extent will return nothing. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN +The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate +the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has +been allocated for the file yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN. +Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's +physical location has not been allocated yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is +encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed). Reading the data in this +extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results. + +Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data +in-place by writing to the indicated location without the +assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the +information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem +is mounted. In other words, user applications may only read the +extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is +unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is +clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the +filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is located within a meta data block. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is packed into a block with data from other files. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN +Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been +initialized. This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read +through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from +the device. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED +This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block +based addressing scheme. Since returning an extent for each block back to +userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most +adjacent blocks into 'extents'. + + +VFS -> File System Implementation +--------------------------------- + +File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on +their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for +defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on +each discovered extent: + +struct inode_operations { + ... + + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, + u64 len); + +->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the +fiemap request: + +struct fiemap_extent_info { + unsigned int fi_flags; /* Flags as passed from user */ + unsigned int fi_extents_mapped; /* Number of mapped extents */ + unsigned int fi_extents_max; /* Size of fiemap_extent array */ + struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start; /* Start of fiemap_extent array */ +}; + +It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this +structure directly. + + +Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the +fiemap_check_flags() helper: + +int fiemap_check_flags(struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo, u32 fs_flags); + +The struct fieinfo should be passed in as recieved from ioctl_fiemap(). The +set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If +fiemap_check_flags finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in +fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from +fiemap_check_flags(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to +ioctl_fiemap(). + + +For each extent in the request range, the file system should call +the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent(): + +int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical, + u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev); + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the +next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will +automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file +system so that the userspace API is not broken. + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the +user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered +while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 1d992ce905c838c2ca26fff8f2417cd31f667fd5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Kerrisk Date: Fri, 3 Oct 2008 15:23:44 -0700 Subject: SubmitChecklist: interfaces changes should CC linux-api@ Mention that patches that change the kernel-userland interface should be CCed to the new list linux-api@vger.kernel.org. Signed-off-by: Michael Kerrisk Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/SubmitChecklist | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist index da10e0714241..21f0795af20f 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist +++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist @@ -67,6 +67,8 @@ kernel patches. 19: All new userspace interfaces are documented in Documentation/ABI/. See Documentation/ABI/README for more information. + Patches that change userspace interfaces should be CCed to + linux-api@vger.kernel.org. 20: Check that it all passes `make headers_check'. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 09b05f5ee04cd2e2af3384d50646f53c76712f10 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Kerrisk Date: Fri, 3 Oct 2008 15:23:45 -0700 Subject: Documentation/HOWTO: info about interface changes should CC linux-api@vger The "Documentation" section of this file mentions that when an interface change is made, I should be CCed with info about the change (so that man-pages can document it). Additionally request that this info be CCed to the new linux-api@vger.kernel.org list. Signed-off-by: Michael Kerrisk Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/HOWTO | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index c2371c5a98f9..48a3955f05fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ documentation files are also added which explain how to use the feature. When a kernel change causes the interface that the kernel exposes to userspace to change, it is recommended that you send the information or a patch to the manual pages explaining the change to the manual pages -maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com. +maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com, and CC the list +linux-api@vger.kernel.org. Here is a list of files that are in the kernel source tree that are required reading: -- cgit v1.2.2 From da3808e10faca68b064ac897753fa4e1707d29a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Darron Broad Date: Tue, 30 Sep 2008 02:46:41 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9099): em28xx: Add detection for K-WORLD DVB-T 310U Correct firmware type to MTS Correct audio routing for composite/s-video Add DVB-T detection. This patch uses the eeprom hash method for detection as the vendor/product ids are also used for the DIGIVOX_AD. This may be a clone of the same product. Explanatory text has been added prior to the hask look-up in anticipation that it may help others. The following has been tested to work: Analogue TV (PAL-I) Composite In DVB-T (UK Crystal Palace) USB AUDIO The following has not been tested but probably works: S-Video In Signed-off-by: Darron Broad Signed-off-by: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 89c7f32abf9f..53449cb99b17 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T (em2870) 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3 (em2870) [185b:2870] 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U (em2880) [eb1a:e305] - 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) + 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) [eb1a:e310] 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D (em2880) [eb1a:e310] 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II (em2880) [eb1a:e320] 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam (em2880) [0ccd:004c] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 95430c0b140c31cb9e39f876afe1c0e9947d1aaf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?R=C3=A9mi=20Denis-Courmont?= Date: Sun, 5 Oct 2008 11:16:36 -0700 Subject: Phonet: pipe end-point protocol documentation MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Rémi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 54 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 54 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 57d3e59edb13..0e6e592f4f55 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -112,6 +112,60 @@ However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). +Phonet Pipe protocol +-------------------- + +The Phonet Pipe protocol is a simple sequenced packets protocol +with end-to-end congestion control. It uses the passive listening +socket paradigm. The listening socket is bound to an unique free object +ID. Each listening socket can handle up to 255 simultaneous +connections, one per accept()'d socket. + + int lfd, cfd; + + lfd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE); + listen (lfd, INT_MAX); + + /* ... */ + cfd = accept(lfd, NULL, NULL); + for (;;) + { + char buf[...]; + ssize_t len = read(cfd, buf, sizeof(buf)); + + /* ... */ + + write(cfd, msg, msglen); + } + +Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" +application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() +is not possible. + +WARNING: +When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an +intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the +polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will +block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode +becomes enabled. + + +The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP accepts one integer value (int) of: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_NONE: The socket operates normally (default). + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP: The socket is used as a backend for a virtual IP + interface. This requires CAP_NET_ADMIN capability. GPRS data + support on Nokia modems can use this. Note that the socket cannot + be reliably poll()'d or read() from while in this mode. + + PNPIPE_IFINDEX is a read-only integer value. It contains the + interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, + or zero if encapsulation is off. + + Authors ------- -- cgit v1.2.2 From a5ac0129249611fc4a35e6d7cd9b8462d67e5798 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sonic Zhang Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 14:07:19 +0800 Subject: Blackfin arch: add supporting for kgdb Signed-off-by: Sonic Zhang Signed-off-by: Bryan Wu --- Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt | 155 ---------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 155 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 84f6a484ae9a..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ - A Simple Guide to Configure KGDB - - Sonic Zhang - Aug. 24th 2006 - - -This KGDB patch enables the kernel developer to do source level debugging on -the kernel for the Blackfin architecture. The debugging works over either the -ethernet interface or one of the uarts. Both software breakpoints and -hardware breakpoints are supported in this version. -http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=kgdb - - -2 known issues: -1. This bug: - http://blackfin.uclinux.org/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=544&group_id=18&atid=145 - The GDB client for Blackfin uClinux causes incorrect values of local - variables to be displayed when the user breaks the running of kernel in GDB. -2. Because of a hardware bug in Blackfin 533 v1.0.3: - 05000067 - Watchpoints (Hardware Breakpoints) are not supported - Hardware breakpoints cannot be set properly. - - -Debug over Ethernet: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (Ethernet)". Add "kgdboe=@target-IP/,@host-IP/" to - the option "Compiled-in Kernel Boot Parameter" under "Kernel hacking". - -4. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image. - -5. Configure the IP "/> ifconfig eth0 target-IP" - -6. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -7. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote udp:target-IP:6443". - -8. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -9. Continue "(gdb) c". - -10. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -11. Breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -12. Display local variables and function paramters. - (*) This operation gives wrong results, see known issue 1. - -13. Single stepping "(gdb) si". - -14. Remove breakpoint 1. "(gdb) del 1" - -15. Set hardware breakpoint "(gdb) hbreak sys_open". - -16. Continue "(gdb) c". - -17. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -18. Hardware breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(...". - (*) This hardware breakpoint will not be hit, see known issue 2. - -19. Continue "(gdb) c". - -20. Interrupt the target in GDB "Ctrl+C". - -21. Detach from the target "(gdb) detach". - -22. Exit GDB "(gdb) quit". - - -Debug over the UART: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (UART)". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to be - a different one from the console. Don't forget to change the mode of - blackfin serial driver to PIO. Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART. - -4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable - "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" - -5. Compile kernel. - -6. Connect minicom to the serial port of the console and boot the kernel image. - -7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600". - -9. Connect to the target on the second serial port "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS1". - -10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -11. Continue "(gdb) c". - -12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -13. A breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. - - -Debug over the same UART as console: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over UART". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to console. - Don't forget to change the mode of blackfin serial driver to PIO. - Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART. - -4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable - "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" - -5. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image. - -6. (Optional) Ask target to wait for gdb connection by entering Ctrl+A. In minicom, you should enter Ctrl+A+A. - -7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600". - -9. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0". - -10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -11. Continue "(gdb) c". Then enter Ctrl+C twice to stop GDB connection. - -12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". Dummy string can be seen on the console. - -13. Then connect the gdb to target again. "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0". - Now you will find a breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. The only - difference is that after continue command in GDB, please stop GDB - connection by 2 "Ctrl+C"s and connect again after breakpoints are hit or - Ctrl+A is entered. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 079aa88fe7172b7650c7cf2c0bc01662bafea236 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jan Engelhardt Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 11:35:00 +0200 Subject: netfilter: xt_recent: IPv6 support This updates xt_recent to support the IPv6 address family. The new /proc/net/xt_recent directory must be used for this. The old proc interface can also be configured out. Signed-off-by: Jan Engelhardt Signed-off-by: Patrick McHardy --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index d0f22fac55da..3d2d0c29f027 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -250,6 +250,9 @@ What (Why): - xt_mark match revision 0 (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1) + - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir + (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent) + When: January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first Why: Superseded by newer revisions or modules Who: Jan Engelhardt -- cgit v1.2.2 From d2f26037a38ada4a5d40d1cf0b32bc5289f50312 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KOVACS Krisztian Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 11:35:12 +0200 Subject: netfilter: Add documentation for tproxy Add basic usage instructions to Documentation/networking. Signed-off-by: KOVACS Krisztian Signed-off-by: Patrick McHardy --- Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt | 85 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 85 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b5996d9357e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +Transparent proxy support +========================= + +This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels. +To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in +your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that +as well. + + +1. Making non-local sockets work +================================ + +The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local +socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that +value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally: + +# iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1 +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT + +# ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100 +# ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100 + +Because of certain restrictions in the IPv4 routing output code you'll have to +modify your application to allow it to send datagrams _from_ non-local IP +addresses. All you have to do is enable the (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) socket +option before calling bind: + +fd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); +/* - 8< -*/ +int value = 1; +setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT, &value, sizeof(value)); +/* - 8< -*/ +name.sin_family = AF_INET; +name.sin_port = htons(0xCAFE); +name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0xDEADBEEF); +bind(fd, &name, sizeof(name)); + +A trivial patch for netcat is available here: +http://people.netfilter.org/hidden/tproxy/netcat-ip_transparent-support.patch + + +2. Redirecting traffic +====================== + +Transparent proxying often involves "intercepting" traffic on a router. This is +usually done with the iptables REDIRECT target; however, there are serious +limitations of that method. One of the major issues is that it actually +modifies the packets to change the destination address -- which might not be +acceptable in certain situations. (Think of proxying UDP for example: you won't +be able to find out the original destination address. Even in case of TCP +getting the original destination address is racy.) + +The 'TPROXY' target provides similar functionality without relying on NAT. Simply +add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above: + +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \ + --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080 + +Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP, +IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket. + + +3. Iptables extensions +====================== + +To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules +compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available +here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git + + +4. Application support +====================== + +4.1. Squid +---------- + +Squid 3.HEAD has support built-in. To use it, pass +'--enable-linux-netfilter' to configure and set the 'tproxy' option on +the HTTP listener you redirect traffic to with the TPROXY iptables +target. + +For more information please consult the following page on the Squid +wiki: http://wiki.squid-cache.org/Features/Tproxy4 -- cgit v1.2.2 From 6a421c1dc94b12923294a359822346f12492de5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Aaron Carroll Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 18:17:15 +1000 Subject: block: update documentation for deadline fifo_batch tunable Update the description of fifo_batch to match the current implementation, and include a description of how to tune it. Signed-off-by: Aaron Carroll Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt | 14 ++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt index c23cab13c3d1..72576769e0f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt @@ -30,12 +30,18 @@ write_expire (in ms) Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes. -fifo_batch +fifo_batch (number of requests) ---------- -When a read request expires its deadline, we must move some requests from -the sorted io scheduler list to the block device dispatch queue. fifo_batch -controls how many requests we move. +Requests are grouped into ``batches'' of a particular data direction (read or +write) which are serviced in increasing sector order. To limit extra seeking, +deadline expiries are only checked between batches. fifo_batch controls the +maximum number of requests per batch. + +This parameter tunes the balance between per-request latency and aggregate +throughput. When low latency is the primary concern, smaller is better (where +a value of 1 yields first-come first-served behaviour). Increasing fifo_batch +generally improves throughput, at the cost of latency variation. writes_starved (number of dispatches) -- cgit v1.2.2 From 710027a48ede75428cc68eaa8ae2269b1e356e2c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 19 Aug 2008 20:13:11 +0200 Subject: Add some block/ source files to the kernel-api docbook. Fix kernel-doc notation in them as needed. Fix changed function parameter names. Fix typos/spellos. In comments, change REQ_SPECIAL to REQ_TYPE_SPECIAL and REQ_BLOCK_PC to REQ_TYPE_BLOCK_PC. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index b7b1482f6e04..f5696ba9ae96 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -364,6 +364,10 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c !Eblock/blk-barrier.c !Eblock/blk-tag.c !Iblock/blk-tag.c +!Eblock/blk-integrity.c +!Iblock/blktrace.c +!Iblock/genhd.c +!Eblock/genhd.c -- cgit v1.2.2 From 79eb014578b79fcfb9d9e7dc979d1316079220aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 09:35:28 -0700 Subject: fix an example of scatterlists handling in DMA-API.txt This example isn't the proper way to handle scatterlists (can't handle sg chaining). Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index d8b63d164e41..b8e86460046e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this: int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction); struct scatterlist *sg; - for (i = 0, sg = sglist; i < count; i++, sg++) { + for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) { hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg); hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg); } -- cgit v1.2.2 From ddedc658fc56bb5b9b200d7f4df6e93e1d0d8048 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Darrick J. Wong" Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 15:33:58 +0200 Subject: hwmon: Define sysfs interface for energy consumption register Describe the sysfs files that were introduced in the ibmaem driver. Signed-off-by: Darrick J. Wong Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 2d845730d4e0..6dbfd5efd991 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -329,6 +329,10 @@ power[1-*]_average Average power use Unit: microWatt RO +power[1-*]_average_interval Power use averaging interval + Unit: milliseconds + RW + power[1-*]_average_highest Historical average maximum power use Unit: microWatt RO @@ -353,6 +357,14 @@ power[1-*]_reset_history Reset input_highest, input_lowest, average_highest and average_lowest. WO +********** +* Energy * +********** + +energy[1-*]_input Cumulative energy use + Unit: microJoule + RO + ********** * Alarms * ********** -- cgit v1.2.2 From c73c556c1ae3619d8a7c55254b0ddcf10034a914 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Darrick J. Wong" Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 15:33:58 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (adt7473) Fix some bogosity in documentation file Signed-off-by: Darrick J. Wong Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 | 18 +++++------------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 index 2126de34c711..1cbf671822e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ Description This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7473 chip family. -The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 +The ADT7473 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3) -temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has three (3) 16-bit counters for +temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for measuring fan speed. There are three (3) PWM outputs that can be used to control fan speed. A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the -LM85 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the +ADT7473 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and programmable. Once configured, the ADT7473 will adjust the PWM outputs in response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention. @@ -46,14 +46,6 @@ from the raw value to get the temperature value. The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control. -Hardware Configurations ------------------------ - -The ADT7473 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be used to -signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature sensors -fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't trigger -SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces the PWM2 function. - Configuration Notes ------------------- @@ -61,8 +53,8 @@ Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following: * PWM Control -* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and -* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp - +* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and +* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp - point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound. point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 8d5922572038bae9f7b16fcb974eee806727b44c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?N=C3=A9meth=20M=C3=A1rton?= Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 14:59:17 +0200 Subject: [CPUFREQ] correct broken links and email addresses MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Replace the no longer working links and email address in the documentation and in source code. Signed-off-by: Márton Németh Signed-off-by: Dave Jones --- Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt | 10 ++++------ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt index ffdb5323df37..3d0b915035b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt @@ -35,11 +35,9 @@ Mailing List ------------ There is a CPU frequency changing CVS commit and general list where you can report bugs, problems or submit patches. To post a message, -send an email to cpufreq@lists.linux.org.uk, to subscribe go to -http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq. Previous post to the -mailing list are available to subscribers at -http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/private/cpufreq/. - +send an email to cpufreq@vger.kernel.org, to subscribe go to +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq and follow the +instructions there. Links ----- @@ -50,7 +48,7 @@ how to access the CVS repository: * http://cvs.arm.linux.org.uk/ the CPUFreq Mailing list: -* http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq +* http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq Clock and voltage scaling for the SA-1100: * http://www.lartmaker.nl/projects/scaling -- cgit v1.2.2 From 3bbfe0596746e1590888a6e1e6a07583265238b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexey Dobriyan Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 03:27:16 +0400 Subject: proc: remove kernel.maps_protect After commit 831830b5a2b5d413407adf380ef62fe17d6fcbf2 aka "restrict reading from /proc//maps to those who share ->mm or can ptrace" sysctl stopped being relevant because commit moved security checks from ->show time to ->start time (mm_for_maps()). Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan Acked-by: Kees Cook --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 7 ------- 1 file changed, 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index f566ad9bcb7b..63ed861d5ca1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1332,13 +1332,6 @@ determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize. -maps_protect ------------- - -Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and -"smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to -readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process. - msgmni ------ -- cgit v1.2.2 From b911e473d24633c19414b54b82b9ff0b1a2419d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 08:22:44 +0200 Subject: doc/cdrom: Trvial documentation error, file not present The sbpcd tester program is not included in the kernel source tree, so remove the reference to it. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Reported-by: Nick Warne Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd index 91c0dcc6fa5c..2c558cd6c1ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd @@ -145,8 +145,7 @@ useful for reading photocds. To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data CDROM. Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman, -workbone, cdplayer, etc.). Lacking anything else, you could use the -cdtester program in Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd. +workbone, cdplayer, etc.). On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support -- cgit v1.2.2 From d45387d8bce2674fd21369a394933a02b8125878 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cornelia Huck Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 21:33:07 +0200 Subject: [S390] cio: Update cio_ignore documentation. Add documentation for the new "purge" cio_ignore parameter. Signed-off-by: Cornelia Huck Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 8 +++++++- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index bf0baa19ec24..428e5c859b69 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -70,13 +70,19 @@ Command line parameters Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device - disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. + disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make + known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below). For example, "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore" will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored devices. + You can remove already known but now ignored devices via + "echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore" + All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use) + will be deregistered and thus removed from the system. + The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd. -- cgit v1.2.2 From e4a1afaeb1d9ebc09f46d8b229ac96116974b1b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cornelia Huck Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 21:33:08 +0200 Subject: [S390] cio: Exorcise cio_msg= from documentation. Signed-off-by: Cornelia Huck Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index 428e5c859b69..339207d11d95 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -104,8 +104,7 @@ debugfs entries handling). - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf - Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages - printed when cio_msg=yes. + Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer. - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, -- cgit v1.2.2 From 03010a3350301baac2154fa66de925ae2981b7e3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 20:02:48 -0400 Subject: ext4: Rename ext4dev to ext4 The ext4 filesystem is getting stable enough that it's time to drop the "dev" prefix. Also remove the requirement for the TEST_FILESYS flag. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 289057958f90..74484e696405 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs 1.41.x. - - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type: + - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type: - # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 + # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development @@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1 - (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev + (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4 filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production filesystems.) - Mounting: - # mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever + # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most. -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5bf5683a33f3584da6eced480967c4f7e11515a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hidehiro Kawai Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 22:12:43 -0400 Subject: ext4: add an option to control error handling on file data If the journal doesn't abort when it gets an IO error in file data blocks, the file data corruption will spread silently. Because most of applications and commands do buffered writes without fsync(), they don't notice the IO error. It's scary for mission critical systems. On the other hand, if the journal aborts whenever it gets an IO error in file data blocks, the system will easily become inoperable. So this patch introduces a filesystem option to determine whether it aborts the journal or just call printk() when it gets an IO error in file data. If you mount an ext4 fs with data_err=abort option, it aborts on file data write error. If you mount it with data_err=ignore, it doesn't abort, just call printk(). data_err=ignore is the default. Here is the corresponding patch of the ext3 version: http://kerneltrap.org/mailarchive/linux-kernel/2008/9/9/3239374 Signed-off-by: Hidehiro Kawai Signed-off-by: Theodore Ts'o --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 74484e696405..eb154ef36c2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -223,6 +223,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. +data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs + in a file data buffer in ordered mode. +data_err=abort Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file + data buffer in ordered mode. + grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator. bsdgroups -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9bed90c6a46f10c2d3052c0585057a5cb7392b92 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Florian Fainelli Date: Sat, 23 Aug 2008 18:54:37 +0200 Subject: Documentation: Document the RB532 specific kmac tag The Routerboard 532 bootloader passes the korina ethernet MAC adapter address to the kernel on the command line. Document this in the kernel-parameters file. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli Signed-off-by: Ralf Baechle --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 329dcabe4c5e..d0fff6302f68 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1014,6 +1014,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file (only serial suported for now) Format: [,baud] + kmac= [MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address. + Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip + Ethernet adapter MAC address. + l2cr= [PPC] l3cr= [PPC] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 8f2b7b70600212f8c809a7bc2d17d33561842440 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Tue, 5 Aug 2008 10:11:25 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8626): Add support for TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) and CDI Brasil (www.cdibrasil.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index 0e2394695bb8..30bbdda68d03 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner @@ -74,3 +74,4 @@ tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600 tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner +tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7d341a6a52f115512d60b2de89b2ebde54da8eff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Tue, 5 Aug 2008 10:14:13 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8628): bttv: Add support for Encore ENLTV2-FM Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) and CDI Brasil (www.cdibrasil.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv index f32efb6fb12c..60ba66836038 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv @@ -150,3 +150,4 @@ 149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684) 150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c] 151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C +152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2 [1000:1801] -- cgit v1.2.2 From aef2d186e381816733fa15d67ad63bd99254cb9e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 4 Aug 2008 21:39:53 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8644): Add support for DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express Add support for the DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express card, based on work by Chris Pascoe and Stephen Backway. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Anton Blanchard Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index f0e613ba55b8..bccafd357853 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -9,3 +9,4 @@ 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101] 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] + 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 28531558006d5c525b19a207a7ab4ec0643191c9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guennadi Liakhovetski Date: Fri, 29 Aug 2008 15:16:31 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8799): soc-camera: add API documentation Signed-off-by: Guennadi Liakhovetski Acked-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt | 120 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 120 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..178ef3c5e579 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + Soc-Camera Subsystem + ==================== + +Terminology +----------- + +The following terms are used in this document: + - camera / camera device / camera sensor - a video-camera sensor chip, capable + of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for + control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data. + - camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a + specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH, + AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31. + - camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be + parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical + and horizontal synchronization signals. + +Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem +----------------------------------- + +The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and +camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently +only the mmap method is supported. + +This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC) +video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable +the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed +to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface, +although most applications have only one camera sensor. + +Existing drivers +---------------- + +As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for +PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers: +mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This +list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree. + +Camera host API +--------------- + +A host camera driver is registered using the + +soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *); + +function. The host object can be initialized as follows: + +static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = { + .drv_name = PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME, + .ops = &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops, +}; + +All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops: + +static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .add = pxa_camera_add_device, + .remove = pxa_camera_remove_device, + .suspend = pxa_camera_suspend, + .resume = pxa_camera_resume, + .set_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap, + .try_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap, + .init_videobuf = pxa_camera_init_videobuf, + .reqbufs = pxa_camera_reqbufs, + .poll = pxa_camera_poll, + .querycap = pxa_camera_querycap, + .try_bus_param = pxa_camera_try_bus_param, + .set_bus_param = pxa_camera_set_bus_param, +}; + +.add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached +from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call +sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume +methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their +responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and +.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the +host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a +video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely +by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from +respective V4L2 operations. + +Camera API +---------- + +Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the +platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected, +and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera. +soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are +used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration +function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter. +This struct can be initialized as follows: + + /* link to driver operations */ + icd->ops = &mt9m001_ops; + /* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */ + icd->control = &client->dev; + /* window geometry */ + icd->x_min = 20; + icd->y_min = 12; + icd->x_current = 20; + icd->y_current = 12; + icd->width_min = 48; + icd->width_max = 1280; + icd->height_min = 32; + icd->height_max = 1024; + icd->y_skip_top = 1; + /* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */ + icd->iface = icl->bus_id; + +struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by +the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera +host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host +driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2 +functionality. + +struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format, +listing pixel formats, supported by the camera. + +-- +Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski -- cgit v1.2.2 From 4c56b04af67211c4311dd9961ce5aba86b96ba9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Tue, 12 Aug 2008 13:30:03 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8807): Add DVB support for the Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H This patch is on behalf of Stephen Backway , and represents two patches I received (and some subsequent whitespace cleanup I had due to how I pulled the patches). From the original author: a) Add DVB support for the Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H. b) The tuner callback previously checked the command 3 times: 1) To see if it was the XC2028_RESET_CLK 2) To see if it was not the XC2028_RESET_TUNER 3) To see if it was the XC2028_RESET_TUNER This patch removes the third check. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Stephen Backway Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index bccafd357853..64823ccacd69 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -10,3 +10,4 @@ 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78] + 12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H [107d:6681] -- cgit v1.2.2 From d654dca7bca79dd3981267e398b6a7df34d3d047 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Sat, 6 Sep 2008 04:18:48 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8927): gspca: PAC 207 webcam 093a:2476 added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 9a3e4d797fa8..89fed5c5add0 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -181,6 +181,7 @@ pac207 093a:2468 PAC207 pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112 pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111 pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110 +pac207 093a:2476 Genius e-Messenger 112 pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 -- cgit v1.2.2 From 7b537391dde35d7f412417a95f02f89af08dd2d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 11:56:49 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8929): gspca: sonixj webcam 0458:702e added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 89fed5c5add0..308ce4ee23d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -42,6 +42,7 @@ zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2 zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3 zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2 sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q +sonixj 0458:702e Genius Slim 310 NB sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000 sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000 ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam -- cgit v1.2.2 From a50f4a444a14a116e2eb077e01c2eaf58ddb7c6a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Date: Mon, 8 Sep 2008 03:23:55 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8936): em28xx-cards: Add vendor/product id for EM2820_BOARD_PROLINK_PLAYTV_USB2 Added vendor/product id for EM2820_BOARD_PROLINK_PLAYTV_USB2 Signed-off-by: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 53449cb99b17..187cc48d0924 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] - 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821] 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5bd1b66359437864e6b46420ba6770c2b1c4362c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 01:17:33 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8987): cx88: Add support for the Hauppauge HVR4000 and HVR4000-LITE (S2) boards Adding support for Hauppauge's cx88 S2 based products, based on the cx24116 DVB-S2 demodulator. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 7cf5685d3645..c95a2fb70c30 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -66,3 +66,5 @@ 65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold [18ac:d610] 66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT [1554:4935] 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] + 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] + 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 2cf801e3e38f649d25fe3b4e236976f45e26289f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 8 Sep 2008 12:07:06 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8990): S2API: DVB-S/S2 voltage selection bug fix Thanks to Hans Werner for finding the problem. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index c95a2fb70c30..b51485c16312 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -68,3 +68,4 @@ 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] + 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 5bacea3b9db1b88eeae5427f41efe65138f056da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 01:45:01 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9021): S2API: Add Kconf dependency Patch provided by Darron Broad Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index b51485c16312..8fea29754107 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -69,3 +69,5 @@ 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] + 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] + 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 301e9d64e0bb00c557d9385474cc9d79db0485d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: hermann pitton Date: Sun, 14 Sep 2008 17:49:14 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9028): saa7134: add support for the triple Asus Tiger 3in1 after looking it up, all rants about the 80 columns restriction seem to be in vain. After changing the card's name it are now "only" seven new lines in the tiny DVB-T/DVB-S switch function. saa7130/34: v4l2 driver version 0.2.14 loaded saa7133[0]: found at 0000:02:08.0, rev: 209, irq: 18, latency: 32, mmio: 0xfdef7000 saa7133[0]: subsystem: 1043:4878, board: Asus Tiger 3in1 [card=147,autodetected] saa7133[0]: board init: gpio is 200000 tuner' 2-004b: chip found @ 0x96 (saa7133[0]) saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 00: 43 10 78 48 54 20 1c 00 43 43 a9 1c 55 d2 b2 92 saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 10: ff ff ff 0f ff 20 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 20: 01 40 01 02 03 01 01 03 08 ff 00 d7 ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 30: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 40: ff 28 00 c2 96 16 03 02 c0 1c ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 50: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 60: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 70: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 80: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 90: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom a0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom b0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom c0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom d0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom e0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom f0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x10 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x16 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x1c [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x96 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0xa0 [eeprom] tda829x 2-004b: setting tuner address to 61 tda829x 2-004b: type set to tda8290+75a saa7133[0]: registered device video0 [v4l2] saa7133[0]: registered device vbi0 saa7133[0]: registered device radio0 DVB: registering new adapter (saa7133[0]) DVB: registering frontend 0 (Philips TDA10086 DVB-S)... The board init gpio is 0x0, 0x200000 is from previously unloading with antenna_switch = 1. It needs firmware for the tda10046 and analog sound needs saa7134-alsa. I have support for one more board and need to fix the first revision of the Asus Tiger DVB-T hybrid. DVB-T currently hangs on the male radio antenna input, also some small other stuff. Please report any issues with this patch, the next are depending on this one. saa7134: add support for the triple Asus Tiger 3in1 Signed-off-by: Hermann Pitton Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 3 ++- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 8fea29754107..075650c95fe6 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -68,6 +68,7 @@ 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] - 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] + 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [d460:9022] 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] + 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 39868af9cf9f..c121f44aefc0 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -145,3 +145,4 @@ 144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193] 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog +147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] -- cgit v1.2.2 From bf1ece6a4f30f05b227f2ec59fa0d45b5db186d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9059): saa7134: Add support for Encore version 5.3 board Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index c121f44aefc0..143836403938 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,3 +146,4 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] +148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 36f6bb97caa772d7dc42250db74253e0867a444a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9060): saa7134: Add support for Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 143836403938..2023c4020ac7 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -147,3 +147,4 @@ 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] +149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9b0001913983de65af17eee8baf02283160f5a69 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9061): saa7134: Add support for Real Audio 220 Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 2023c4020ac7..aa06151a2efb 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,5 +146,6 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] +147 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] -- cgit v1.2.2 From a31d2bb773f23f55cc6713f2d1a9b60977bb8f89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Mon, 29 Sep 2008 12:08:29 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9062): Add support for Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme Thanks to Sidney Matias for getting GPIO values and testing on this device. Cc: Sidney Matias Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 075650c95fe6..50d0b1c559a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -72,3 +72,4 @@ 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] + 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976] -- cgit v1.2.2 From f689d9083a3a46ae3801c37d0dbcb170fc6a9608 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adam Glover Date: Tue, 6 May 2008 03:20:27 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9063): Add ADS Tech Instant HDTV PCI support Add PCI ID and device specific tables for ADS Tech Instant HDTV. [mchehab@redhat.com: make checkpatch happy and fix merge conflicts] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index aa06151a2efb..727b5f214772 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,6 +146,7 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] -147 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] +150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 +151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9f4c0617edcc676a5281c04bf48a305b80dd5397 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 02:57:56 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9081): gspca: Bad webcam name of 046d:092f in documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 308ce4ee23d4..a845667ac437 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ spca561 046d:092b Labtec Webcam Plus spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2 spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2 spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2 -spca561 046d:092f Logitech QC Elch2 +spca561 046d:092f Logitech QuickCam Express Plus sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420 sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC -- cgit v1.2.2 From 97076859590ada76dc4bee46b6ccad86d89e82cf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Frank Zago Date: Mon, 29 Sep 2008 06:59:36 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9088): gspca: New subdriver 'finepix' added. Signed-off-by: Frank Zago Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 23 +++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index a845667ac437..04c612eb897c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -97,6 +97,29 @@ sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300 sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500 sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410 spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016 +finepix 04cb:0104 Fujifilm FinePix 4800 +finepix 04cb:0109 Fujifilm FinePix A202 +finepix 04cb:010b Fujifilm FinePix A203 +finepix 04cb:010f Fujifilm FinePix A204 +finepix 04cb:0111 Fujifilm FinePix A205 +finepix 04cb:0113 Fujifilm FinePix A210 +finepix 04cb:0115 Fujifilm FinePix A303 +finepix 04cb:0117 Fujifilm FinePix A310 +finepix 04cb:0119 Fujifilm FinePix F401 +finepix 04cb:011b Fujifilm FinePix F402 +finepix 04cb:011d Fujifilm FinePix F410 +finepix 04cb:0121 Fujifilm FinePix F601 +finepix 04cb:0123 Fujifilm FinePix F700 +finepix 04cb:0125 Fujifilm FinePix M603 +finepix 04cb:0127 Fujifilm FinePix S300 +finepix 04cb:0129 Fujifilm FinePix S304 +finepix 04cb:012b Fujifilm FinePix S500 +finepix 04cb:012d Fujifilm FinePix S602 +finepix 04cb:012f Fujifilm FinePix S700 +finepix 04cb:0131 Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013b Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013d Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013f Fujifilm FinePix F420 sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50 spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100 sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C -- cgit v1.2.2 From c109f8168f259ea1f1ab7009c6b99dbe8ea0e2b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Erik Andren Date: Wed, 1 Oct 2008 04:51:53 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9091): gspca: Subdriver m5602 (ALi) added. This patch adds support for the ALi m5602 usb bridge and is based on the gspca framework. It contains code for communicating with 5 different sensors: OmniVision OV9650, Pixel Plus PO1030, Samsung S5K83A, S5K4AA and finally Micron MT9M111. Signed-off-by: Erik Andren Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine [mchehab@redhat.com: fix m5602/Makefile] [mchehab@redhat.com: extern debug caused conflicts. Renamed to m5602_debug] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 13 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 04c612eb897c..004818fab040 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ The modules are: xxxx vend:prod ---- spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera +m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325 spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200 zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live! diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4450ab13f37b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected +to the following supported sensors: +OmniVision OV9650, +Samsung s5k83a, +Samsung s5k4aa, +Micron mt9m111, +Pixel plus PO1030 + +This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution. +In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats + +Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net -- cgit v1.2.2 From 028165a336ab7d097d23e2af936dea373e3d3afc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hermann Pitton Date: Sat, 4 Oct 2008 21:37:36 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9113): saa7134: fixes for the Asus Tiger Revision 1.00 In opposite to the P7131 Dual this early OEM card has a male radio antenna connector and also no remote. We currently switch the DVB-T RF feed to the radio input, like on the P7131 with female radio connector used also for DVB-T and should improve this. Signed-off-by: Hermann Pitton Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 727b5f214772..dc67eef38ff9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ 75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044] 76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9] 77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e] - 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4857] + 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862] 79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B) 80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210] 81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018] @@ -150,3 +150,4 @@ 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] 150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] +152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 57f51dbc45f65f7ee1e8c8f77200bb8000e3e271 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oleg Roitburd Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 06:48:08 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9186): Added support for Prof 7300 DVB-S/S2 cards Added support for Prof 7300 DVB-S/S2 card. The card based on cx24116 demodulator. Signed-off-by: Oleg Roitburd Signed-off-by: Steven Toth [mchehab@redhat.com: fixed CARDLIST.cx88 entry] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 50d0b1c559a9..a5227e308f4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -73,3 +73,4 @@ 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976] + 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033] -- cgit v1.2.2 From 02f11f392434656f00fdcc8c51348d52bd39afe8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adrian Bunk Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 10:31:59 +0100 Subject: coldfire: scheduled SERIAL_COLDFIRE removal This patch contains the scheduled removal of the obsolete SERIAL_COLDFIRE driver. Signed-off-by: Adrian Bunk Signed-off-by: Alan Cox Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 8 -------- 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 3d2d0c29f027..cc8093c15cf5 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -287,14 +287,6 @@ Who: Glauber Costa --------------------------- -What: old style serial driver for ColdFire (CONFIG_SERIAL_COLDFIRE) -When: 2.6.28 -Why: This driver still uses the old interface and has been replaced - by CONFIG_SERIAL_MCF. -Who: Sebastian Siewior - ---------------------------- - What: /sys/o2cb symlink When: January 2010 Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb -- cgit v1.2.2 From 9c6102d446985bca9c426cb2d9b478ed21d2b024 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Elias Oltmanns Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 21:39:50 +0200 Subject: ata: Add documentation for hard disk shock protection interface (v3) Put some information (and pointers to more) into the kernel's doc tree, describing briefly the interface to the kernel's disk head unloading facility. Information about how to set up a complete shock protection system under GNU/Linux can be found on the web and is referenced accordingly. v3: Here is some final polish including various spelling corrections pointed out by Grant Grundler and Peter Moulder. Also, I have added some information about the timing constraints related to disk head parking. The patch looks more impressive than it really is and I think it would be alright just to incorporate it into the original patch so as not to clutter up the git log. Signed-off-by: Elias Oltmanns Cc: Jeff Garzik Cc: Randy Dunlap Cc: Tejun Heo Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt | 149 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 149 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0e6ba2663834 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +Hard disk shock protection +========================== + +Author: Elias Oltmanns +Last modified: 2008-10-03 + + +0. Contents +----------- + +1. Intro +2. The interface +3. References +4. CREDITS + + +1. Intro +-------- + +ATA/ATAPI-7 specifies the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with unload feature. +Issuing this command should cause the drive to switch to idle mode and +unload disk heads. This feature is being used in modern laptops in +conjunction with accelerometers and appropriate software to implement +a shock protection facility. The idea is to stop all I/O operations on +the internal hard drive and park its heads on the ramp when critical +situations are anticipated. The desire to have such a feature +available on GNU/Linux systems has been the original motivation to +implement a generic disk head parking interface in the Linux kernel. +Please note, however, that other components have to be set up on your +system in order to get disk shock protection working (see +section 3. References below for pointers to more information about +that). + + +2. The interface +---------------- + +For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file +block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under +/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with +-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature. +Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads +of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations +for the specified number of milliseconds. When the timeout expires and +no further disk head park request has been issued in the meantime, +normal operation will be resumed. The maximal value accepted for a +timeout is 30000 milliseconds. Exceeding this limit will return +-EOVERFLOW, but heads will be parked anyway and the timeout will be +set to 30 seconds. However, you can always change a timeout to any +value between 0 and 30000 by issuing a subsequent head park request +before the timeout of the previous one has expired. In particular, the +total timeout can exceed 30 seconds and, more importantly, you can +cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation +immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected +with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the +timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired, +reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number +of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed; +otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0. + +For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive +/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds: + +# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +A simple + +# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation +will be resumed. + +A word of caution: The fact that the interface operates on a basis of +milliseconds may raise expectations that cannot be satisfied in +reality. In fact, the ATA specs clearly state that the time for an +unload operation to complete is vendor specific. The hint in ATA-7 +that this will typically be within 500 milliseconds apparently has +been dropped in ATA-8. + +There is a technical detail of this implementation that may cause some +confusion and should be discussed here. When a head park request has +been issued to a device successfully, all I/O operations on the +controller port this device is attached to will be deferred. That is +to say, any other device that may be connected to the same port will +be affected too. The only exception is that a subsequent head unload +request to that other device will be executed immediately. Further +operations on that port will be deferred until the timeout specified +for either device on the port has expired. As far as PATA (old style +IDE) configurations are concerned, there can only be two devices +attached to any single port. In SATA world we have port multipliers +which means that a user-issued head parking request to one device may +actually result in stopping I/O to a whole bunch of devices. However, +since this feature is supposed to be used on laptops and does not seem +to be very useful in any other environment, there will be mostly one +device per port. Even if the CD/DVD writer happens to be connected to +the same port as the hard drive, it generally *should* recover just +fine from the occasional buffer under-run incurred by a head park +request to the HD. Actually, when you are using an ide driver rather +than its libata counterpart (i.e. your disk is called /dev/hda +instead of /dev/sda), then parking the heads of one drive (drive X) +will generally not affect the mode of operation of another drive +(drive Y) on the same port as described above. It is only when a port +reset is required to recover from an exception on drive Y that further +I/O operations on that drive (and the reset itself) will be delayed +until drive X is no longer in the parked state. + +Finally, there are some hard drives that only comply with an earlier +version of the ATA standard than ATA-7, but do support the unload +feature nonetheless. Unfortunately, there is no safe way Linux can +detect these devices, so you won't be able to write to the +unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does +support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your +laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the +kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing +the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute: + +# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will +disable it again. + + +3. References +------------- + +There are several laptops from different vendors featuring shock +protection capabilities. As manufacturers have refused to support open +source development of the required software components so far, Linux +support for shock protection varies considerably between different +hardware implementations. Ideally, this section should contain a list +of pointers at different projects aiming at an implementation of shock +protection on different systems. Unfortunately, I only know of a +single project which, although still considered experimental, is fit +for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims +of my ignorance. + +- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS + See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk + active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads. + + +4. CREDITS +---------- + +This implementation of disk head parking has been inspired by a patch +originally published by Jon Escombe . My efforts +to develop an implementation of this feature that is fit to be merged +into mainline have been aided by various kernel developers, in +particular by Tejun Heo and Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz. -- cgit v1.2.2 From a5766f11cfd3a0c03450d99c8fe548c2940be884 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Liam Girdwood Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 13:22:20 +0100 Subject: regulator: core - Rework machine API to remove string based functions. This improves the machine level API in order to configure regulator constraints and consumers as platform data and removes the old string based API that required several calls to set up each regulator. The intention is to create a struct regulator_init_data, populate it's fields with constraints, consumers devices, etc and then register the regulator device from board.c in the standard Linux way. e.g. regulator LDO2 (supplying codec and sim) platform data. /* regulator LDO2 consumer devices */ static struct regulator_consumer_supply ldo2_consumers[] = { { .dev = &platform_audio_device.dev, .supply = "codec_avdd", }, { .dev = &platform_sim_device.dev, .supply = "sim_vcc", } }; /* regulator LDO2 constraints */ static struct regulator_init_data ldo2_data = { .constraints = { .min_uV = 3300000, .max_uV = 3300000, .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, .apply_uV = 1, }, .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(ldo2_consumers), .consumer_supplies = ldo2_consumers, }; /* machine regulator devices with thier consumers and constraints */ static struct platform_device wm8350_regulator_devices[] = { { .name = "wm8350-regulator", .id = WM8350_LDO_2, .dev = { .platform_data = &ldo2_data, }, }, }; Changes in detail:- o Removed all const char* regulator config functions in machine API. o Created new struct regulator_init_data to contain regulator machine configuration constraints and consmuers. o Changed set_supply(), set_machine_constraints(), set_consumer_device_supply() to remove their string identifier parameters. Also made them static and moved functions nearer top of core.c. o Removed no longer used inline func to_rdev() o Added regulator_get_init_drvdata() to retrieve init data. o Added struct device* as parameter to regulator_register(). o Changed my email address. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 140 +++++++++++++--------------- Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt | 8 +- 2 files changed, 70 insertions(+), 78 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index c9a35665cf70..ce3487d99abe 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -2,17 +2,8 @@ Regulator Machine Driver Interface =================================== The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific -initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that -machine drivers would do are :- +initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. - 1. Regulator -> Device mapping. - 2. Regulator supply configuration. - 3. Power Domain constraint setting. - - - -1. Regulator -> device mapping -============================== Consider the following machine :- Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] @@ -21,81 +12,82 @@ Consider the following machine :- The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine -initialisation code by calling :- +initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for +each regulator. + +struct regulator_consumer_supply { + struct device *dev; /* consumer */ + const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */ +}; -int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev, - const char *supply); +e.g. for the machine above -and is shown with the following code :- +static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = { +{ + .dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev, + .supply = "Vcc", +},}; -regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc"); -regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc"); +static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = { +{ + .dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev, + .supply = "Vcc", +},}; This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A. - -2. Regulator supply configuration. -================================== -Consider the following machine (again) :- - - Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] - | - +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] +Constraints can now be registered by defining a struct regulator_init_data +for each regulator power domain. This structure also maps the consumers +to their supply regulator :- + +static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { + .constraints = { + .min_uV = 3300000, + .max_uV = 3300000, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, + }, + .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator1_consumers), + .consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers, +}; Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's -supply (Regulator-2). - -This relationship can be register with the core via :- - -int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply); - -In this example we would use the following code :- - -regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1"); - -Relationships can be queried by calling :- - -const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator); - - -3. Power Domain constraint setting. -=================================== -Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and -current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always -operated within specifications. - -Consider the following machine (again) :- - - Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] - | - +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] - -This gives us two regulators and two power domains: - - Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. - Domain 2: Consumer A. - -Constraints can be registered by calling :- - -int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator, - struct regulation_constraints *constraints); - -The example is defined as follows :- - -struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = { - .min_uV = 3300000, - .max_uV = 3300000, - .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator_dev +field below:- + +static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = { + .supply_regulator_dev = &platform_regulator1_device.dev, + .constraints = { + .min_uV = 1800000, + .max_uV = 2000000, + .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, + }, + .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator2_consumers), + .consumer_supplies = regulator2_consumers, }; -struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = { - .min_uV = 1800000, - .max_uV = 2000000, - .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, - .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner. + +static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = { +{ + .name = "regulator", + .id = DCDC_1, + .dev = { + .platform_data = ®ulator1_data, + }, +}, +{ + .name = "regulator", + .id = DCDC_2, + .dev = { + .platform_data = ®ulator2_data, + }, +}, }; +/* register regulator 1 device */ +platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[0]); -regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1); -regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2); +/* register regulator 2 device */ +platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[1]); diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt index a69050143592..4200accb9bba 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ Registration Drivers can register a regulator by calling :- -struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc, - void *reg_data); +struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct device *dev, + struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc); -This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator -core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver). +This will register the regulators capabilities and operations to the regulator +core. Regulators can be unregistered by calling :- -- cgit v1.2.2 From 8a62ab4c4eaf5bce4d9cc84b77d6402c4742d9ab Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Liam Girdwood Date: Sun, 14 Sep 2008 17:40:21 +0100 Subject: regulator: update email address for Liam Girdwood Additionally added another web resource for voltage regulators. Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator | 42 ++++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 21 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator index 79a4a75b2d2c..84e66fdad028 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called state. This holds the regulator output state. @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called type. This holds the regulator type. @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent. This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating -- cgit v1.2.2 From bc558a60b58f638ee0188affb627d4894a97b1c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 15:33:20 +0100 Subject: regulator: Export regulator name via sysfs Provide a new file 'name' in the regulator sysfs class with a human readable name for the regulator for use in applications. Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator index 84e66fdad028..3731f6f29bcb 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -157,6 +157,19 @@ Description: platform code. +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../name +Date: October 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.28 +Contact: Liam Girdwood +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + name. This holds a string identifying the regulator for + display purposes. + + NOTE: this will be empty if no suitable name is provided + by platform or regulator drivers. + + What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -- cgit v1.2.2